microsoft
/
WSL2-Linux-Kernel
зеркало из https://github.com/microsoft/WSL2-Linux-Kernel.git
1
0
Форкнуть 0
Код Задачи Пакеты Проекты Релизы Вики Активность

Merge branch 'upstream'

This commit is contained in:
Jeff Garzik 2006-01-17 10:26:28 -05:00
Родитель 02f693c711 1bc4ccfff8
Коммит 0825788ff2
5476 изменённых файлов: 318141 добавлений и 155299 удалений
Показать статистику Скачать Patch файл Скачать Diff файл Показать все файлы Свернуть все файлы

2
.gitignore поставляемый
Просмотреть файл

@ -10,6 +10,7 @@
*.a
*.s
*.ko
*.so
*.mod.c
#
@ -23,6 +24,7 @@ Module.symvers
# Generated include files
#
include/asm
include/asm-*/asm-offsets.h
include/config
include/linux/autoconf.h
include/linux/compile.h

3
CREDITS
Просмотреть файл

@ -1883,6 +1883,7 @@ N: Jaya Kumar
E: jayalk@intworks.biz
W: http://www.intworks.biz
D: Arc monochrome LCD framebuffer driver, x86 reboot fixups
D: pirq addr, CS5535 alsa audio driver
S: Gurgaon, India
S: Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia
@ -3202,7 +3203,7 @@ N: Eugene Surovegin
E: ebs@ebshome.net
W: http://kernel.ebshome.net/
P: 1024D/AE5467F1 FF22 39F1 6728 89F6 6E6C 2365 7602 F33D AE54 67F1
D: Embedded PowerPC 4xx: I2C, PIC and random hacks/fixes
D: Embedded PowerPC 4xx: EMAC, I2C, PIC and random hacks/fixes
S: Sunnyvale, California 94085
S: USA

31
Documentation/Changes
Просмотреть файл

@ -31,8 +31,6 @@ al espa
Eine deutsche Version dieser Datei finden Sie unter
<http://www.stefan-winter.de/Changes-2.4.0.txt>.
Last updated: October 29th, 2002
Chris Ricker (kaboom@gatech.edu or chris.ricker@genetics.utah.edu).
Current Minimal Requirements
@ -48,7 +46,7 @@ necessary on all systems; obviously, if you don't have any ISDN
hardware, for example, you probably needn't concern yourself with
isdn4k-utils.
o Gnu C 2.95.3 # gcc --version
o Gnu C 3.2 # gcc --version
o Gnu make 3.79.1 # make --version
o binutils 2.12 # ld -v
o util-linux 2.10o # fdformat --version
@ -74,26 +72,7 @@ GCC
---
The gcc version requirements may vary depending on the type of CPU in your
computer. The next paragraph applies to users of x86 CPUs, but not
necessarily to users of other CPUs. Users of other CPUs should obtain
information about their gcc version requirements from another source.
The recommended compiler for the kernel is gcc 2.95.x (x >= 3), and it
should be used when you need absolute stability. You may use gcc 3.0.x
instead if you wish, although it may cause problems. Later versions of gcc
have not received much testing for Linux kernel compilation, and there are
almost certainly bugs (mainly, but not exclusively, in the kernel) that
will need to be fixed in order to use these compilers. In any case, using
pgcc instead of plain gcc is just asking for trouble.
The Red Hat gcc 2.96 compiler subtree can also be used to build this tree.
You should ensure you use gcc-2.96-74 or later. gcc-2.96-54 will not build
the kernel correctly.
In addition, please pay attention to compiler optimization. Anything
greater than -O2 may not be wise. Similarly, if you choose to use gcc-2.95.x
or derivatives, be sure not to use -fstrict-aliasing (which, depending on
your version of gcc 2.95.x, may necessitate using -fno-strict-aliasing).
computer.
Make
----
@ -322,9 +301,9 @@ Getting updated software
Kernel compilation
******************
gcc 2.95.3
----------
o <ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gcc/gcc-2.95.3.tar.gz>
gcc
---
o <ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gcc/>
Make
----

43
Documentation/CodingStyle
Просмотреть файл

@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ The rationale is:
modifications are prevented
- saves the compiler work to optimize redundant code away ;)
int fun(int )
int fun(int a)
{
int result = 0;
char *buffer = kmalloc(SIZE);
@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ Remember: if another thread can find your data structure, and you don't
have a reference count on it, you almost certainly have a bug.
Chapter 11: Macros, Enums, Inline functions and RTL
Chapter 11: Macros, Enums and RTL
Names of macros defining constants and labels in enums are capitalized.
@ -429,7 +429,35 @@ from void pointer to any other pointer type is guaranteed by the C programming
language.
Chapter 14: References
Chapter 14: The inline disease
There appears to be a common misperception that gcc has a magic "make me
faster" speedup option called "inline". While the use of inlines can be
appropriate (for example as a means of replacing macros, see Chapter 11), it
very often is not. Abundant use of the inline keyword leads to a much bigger
kernel, which in turn slows the system as a whole down, due to a bigger
icache footprint for the CPU and simply because there is less memory
available for the pagecache. Just think about it; a pagecache miss causes a
disk seek, which easily takes 5 miliseconds. There are a LOT of cpu cycles
that can go into these 5 miliseconds.
A reasonable rule of thumb is to not put inline at functions that have more
than 3 lines of code in them. An exception to this rule are the cases where
a parameter is known to be a compiletime constant, and as a result of this
constantness you *know* the compiler will be able to optimize most of your
function away at compile time. For a good example of this later case, see
the kmalloc() inline function.
Often people argue that adding inline to functions that are static and used
only once is always a win since there is no space tradeoff. While this is
technically correct, gcc is capable of inlining these automatically without
help, and the maintenance issue of removing the inline when a second user
appears outweighs the potential value of the hint that tells gcc to do
something it would have done anyway.
Chapter 15: References
The C Programming Language, Second Edition
by Brian W. Kernighan and Dennis M. Ritchie.
@ -444,10 +472,13 @@ ISBN 0-201-61586-X.
URL: http://cm.bell-labs.com/cm/cs/tpop/
GNU manuals - where in compliance with K&R and this text - for cpp, gcc,
gcc internals and indent, all available from http://www.gnu.org
gcc internals and indent, all available from http://www.gnu.org/manual/
WG14 is the international standardization working group for the programming
language C, URL: http://std.dkuug.dk/JTC1/SC22/WG14/
language C, URL: http://www.open-std.org/JTC1/SC22/WG14/
Kernel CodingStyle, by greg@kroah.com at OLS 2002:
http://www.kroah.com/linux/talks/ols_2002_kernel_codingstyle_talk/html/
--
Last updated on 16 February 2004 by a community effort on LKML.
Last updated on 30 December 2005 by a community effort on LKML.

6
Documentation/DocBook/.gitignore поставляемый Normal file
Просмотреть файл

@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
*.xml
*.ps
*.pdf
*.html
*.9.gz
*.9

6
Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl
Просмотреть файл

@ -53,6 +53,11 @@
!Iinclude/linux/sched.h
!Ekernel/sched.c
!Ekernel/timer.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>High-resolution timers</title>
!Iinclude/linux/ktime.h
!Iinclude/linux/hrtimer.h
!Ekernel/hrtimer.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Internal Functions</title>
!Ikernel/exit.c
@ -369,6 +374,7 @@ X!Edrivers/acpi/motherboard.c
X!Edrivers/acpi/bus.c
-->
!Edrivers/acpi/scan.c
!Idrivers/acpi/scan.c
<!-- No correct structured comments
X!Edrivers/acpi/pci_bind.c
-->

22
Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl
Просмотреть файл

@ -222,7 +222,7 @@
<title>Two Main Types of Kernel Locks: Spinlocks and Semaphores</title>
<para>
There are two main types of kernel locks. The fundamental type
There are three main types of kernel locks. The fundamental type
is the spinlock
(<filename class="headerfile">include/asm/spinlock.h</filename>),
which is a very simple single-holder lock: if you can't get the
@ -230,16 +230,22 @@
very small and fast, and can be used anywhere.
</para>
<para>
The second type is a semaphore
The second type is a mutex
(<filename class="headerfile">include/linux/mutex.h</filename>): it
is like a spinlock, but you may block holding a mutex.
If you can't lock a mutex, your task will suspend itself, and be woken
up when the mutex is released. This means the CPU can do something
else while you are waiting. There are many cases when you simply
can't sleep (see <xref linkend="sleeping-things"/>), and so have to
use a spinlock instead.
</para>
<para>
The third type is a semaphore
(<filename class="headerfile">include/asm/semaphore.h</filename>): it
can have more than one holder at any time (the number decided at
initialization time), although it is most commonly used as a
single-holder lock (a mutex). If you can't get a semaphore,
your task will put itself on the queue, and be woken up when the
semaphore is released. This means the CPU will do something
else while you are waiting, but there are many cases when you
simply can't sleep (see <xref linkend="sleeping-things"/>), and so
have to use a spinlock instead.
single-holder lock (a mutex). If you can't get a semaphore, your
task will be suspended and later on woken up - just like for mutexes.
</para>
<para>
Neither type of lock is recursive: see

1
Documentation/DocBook/usb.tmpl
Просмотреть файл

@ -253,6 +253,7 @@
!Edrivers/usb/core/urb.c
!Edrivers/usb/core/message.c
!Edrivers/usb/core/file.c
!Edrivers/usb/core/driver.c
!Edrivers/usb/core/usb.c
!Edrivers/usb/core/hub.c
</chapter>

4
Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl
Просмотреть файл

@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ int __init myradio_init(struct video_init *v)
static int users = 0;
static int radio_open(stuct video_device *dev, int flags)
static int radio_open(struct video_device *dev, int flags)
{
if(users)
return -EBUSY;
@ -949,7 +949,7 @@ int __init mycamera_init(struct video_init *v)
static int users = 0;
static int camera_open(stuct video_device *dev, int flags)
static int camera_open(struct video_device *dev, int flags)
{
if(users)
return -EBUSY;

87
Documentation/RCU/rcuref.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -1,74 +1,67 @@
Refcounter framework for elements of lists/arrays protected by
RCU.
Refcounter design for elements of lists/arrays protected by RCU.
Refcounting on elements of lists which are protected by traditional
reader/writer spinlocks or semaphores are straight forward as in:
1. 2.
add() search_and_reference()
{ {
alloc_object read_lock(&list_lock);
... search_for_element
atomic_set(&el->rc, 1); atomic_inc(&el->rc);
write_lock(&list_lock); ...
add_element read_unlock(&list_lock);
... ...
write_unlock(&list_lock); }
1. 2.
add() search_and_reference()
{ {
alloc_object read_lock(&list_lock);
... search_for_element
atomic_set(&el->rc, 1); atomic_inc(&el->rc);
write_lock(&list_lock); ...
add_element read_unlock(&list_lock);
... ...
write_unlock(&list_lock); }
}
3. 4.
release_referenced() delete()
{ {
... write_lock(&list_lock);
atomic_dec(&el->rc, relfunc) ...
... delete_element
} write_unlock(&list_lock);
...
if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc))
kfree(el);
...
... write_lock(&list_lock);
atomic_dec(&el->rc, relfunc) ...
... delete_element
} write_unlock(&list_lock);
...
if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc))
kfree(el);
...
}
If this list/array is made lock free using rcu as in changing the
write_lock in add() and delete() to spin_lock and changing read_lock
in search_and_reference to rcu_read_lock(), the rcuref_get in
in search_and_reference to rcu_read_lock(), the atomic_get in
search_and_reference could potentially hold reference to an element which
has already been deleted from the list/array. rcuref_lf_get_rcu takes
has already been deleted from the list/array. atomic_inc_not_zero takes
care of this scenario. search_and_reference should look as;
1. 2.
add() search_and_reference()
{ {
alloc_object rcu_read_lock();
... search_for_element
atomic_set(&el->rc, 1); if (rcuref_inc_lf(&el->rc)) {
write_lock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock();
return FAIL;
add_element }
... ...
write_unlock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock();
alloc_object rcu_read_lock();
... search_for_element
atomic_set(&el->rc, 1); if (atomic_inc_not_zero(&el->rc)) {
write_lock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock();
return FAIL;
add_element }
... ...
write_unlock(&list_lock); rcu_read_unlock();
} }
3. 4.
release_referenced() delete()
{ {
... write_lock(&list_lock);
rcuref_dec(&el->rc, relfunc) ...
... delete_element
} write_unlock(&list_lock);
...
if (rcuref_dec_and_test(&el->rc))
call_rcu(&el->head, el_free);
...
... write_lock(&list_lock);
atomic_dec(&el->rc, relfunc) ...
... delete_element
} write_unlock(&list_lock);
...
if (atomic_dec_and_test(&el->rc))
call_rcu(&el->head, el_free);
...
}
Sometimes, reference to the element need to be obtained in the
update (write) stream. In such cases, rcuref_inc_lf might be an overkill
since the spinlock serialising list updates are held. rcuref_inc
update (write) stream. In such cases, atomic_inc_not_zero might be an
overkill since the spinlock serialising list updates are held. atomic_inc
is to be used in such cases.
For arches which do not have cmpxchg rcuref_inc_lf
api uses a hashed spinlock implementation and the same hashed spinlock
is acquired in all rcuref_xxx primitives to preserve atomicity.
Note: Use rcuref_inc api only if you need to use rcuref_inc_lf on the
refcounter atleast at one place. Mixing rcuref_inc and atomic_xxx api
might lead to races. rcuref_inc_lf() must be used in lockfree
RCU critical sections only.

24
Documentation/SubmittingDrivers
Просмотреть файл

@ -27,18 +27,17 @@ Who To Submit Drivers To
------------------------
Linux 2.0:
No new drivers are accepted for this kernel tree
No new drivers are accepted for this kernel tree.
Linux 2.2:
No new drivers are accepted for this kernel tree.
Linux 2.4:
If the code area has a general maintainer then please submit it to
the maintainer listed in MAINTAINERS in the kernel file. If the
maintainer does not respond or you cannot find the appropriate
maintainer then please contact the 2.2 kernel maintainer:
Marc-Christian Petersen <m.c.p@wolk-project.de>.
Linux 2.4:
The same rules apply as 2.2. The final contact point for Linux 2.4
submissions is Marcelo Tosatti <marcelo.tosatti@cyclades.com>.
maintainer then please contact Marcelo Tosatti
<marcelo.tosatti@cyclades.com>.
Linux 2.6:
The same rules apply as 2.4 except that you should follow linux-kernel
@ -53,6 +52,7 @@ Licensing: The code must be released to us under the
of exclusive GPL licensing, and if you wish the driver
to be useful to other communities such as BSD you may well
wish to release under multiple licenses.
See accepted licenses at include/linux/module.h
Copyright: The copyright owner must agree to use of GPL.
It's best if the submitter and copyright owner
@ -143,5 +143,13 @@ KernelNewbies:
http://kernelnewbies.org/
Linux USB project:
http://sourceforge.net/projects/linux-usb/
http://www.linux-usb.org/
How to NOT write kernel driver by arjanv@redhat.com
http://people.redhat.com/arjanv/olspaper.pdf
Kernel Janitor:
http://janitor.kernelnewbies.org/
--
Last updated on 17 Nov 2005.

68
Documentation/SubmittingPatches
Просмотреть файл

@ -78,7 +78,9 @@ Randy Dunlap's patch scripts:
http://www.xenotime.net/linux/scripts/patching-scripts-002.tar.gz
Andrew Morton's patch scripts:
http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/patch-scripts-0.20
http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/
Instead of these scripts, quilt is the recommended patch management
tool (see above).
@ -97,7 +99,7 @@ need to split up your patch. See #3, next.
3) Separate your changes.
Separate each logical change into its own patch.
Separate _logical changes_ into a single patch file.
For example, if your changes include both bug fixes and performance
enhancements for a single driver, separate those changes into two
@ -112,6 +114,10 @@ If one patch depends on another patch in order for a change to be
complete, that is OK. Simply note "this patch depends on patch X"
in your patch description.
If you cannot condense your patch set into a smaller set of patches,
then only post say 15 or so at a time and wait for review and integration.
4) Select e-mail destination.
@ -124,6 +130,10 @@ your patch to the primary Linux kernel developer's mailing list,
linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org. Most kernel developers monitor this
e-mail list, and can comment on your changes.
Do not send more than 15 patches at once to the vger mailing lists!!!
Linus Torvalds is the final arbiter of all changes accepted into the
Linux kernel. His e-mail address is <torvalds@osdl.org>. He gets
a lot of e-mail, so typically you should do your best to -avoid- sending
@ -149,6 +159,9 @@ USB, framebuffer devices, the VFS, the SCSI subsystem, etc. See the
MAINTAINERS file for a mailing list that relates specifically to
your change.
Majordomo lists of VGER.KERNEL.ORG at:
<http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html>
If changes affect userland-kernel interfaces, please send
the MAN-PAGES maintainer (as listed in the MAINTAINERS file)
a man-pages patch, or at least a notification of the change,
@ -158,7 +171,7 @@ Even if the maintainer did not respond in step #4, make sure to ALWAYS
copy the maintainer when you change their code.
For small patches you may want to CC the Trivial Patch Monkey
trivial@rustcorp.com.au set up by Rusty Russell; which collects "trivial"
trivial@kernel.org managed by Adrian Bunk; which collects "trivial"
patches. Trivial patches must qualify for one of the following rules:
Spelling fixes in documentation
Spelling fixes which could break grep(1).
@ -171,7 +184,7 @@ patches. Trivial patches must qualify for one of the following rules:
since people copy, as long as it's trivial)
Any fix by the author/maintainer of the file. (ie. patch monkey
in re-transmission mode)
URL: <http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/rusty/trivial/>
URL: <http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/bunk/trivial/>
@ -373,27 +386,14 @@ a diffstat, to show what files have changed, and the number of inserted
and deleted lines per file. A diffstat is especially useful on bigger
patches. Other comments relevant only to the moment or the maintainer,
not suitable for the permanent changelog, should also go here.
Use diffstat options "-p 1 -w 70" so that filenames are listed from the
top of the kernel source tree and don't use too much horizontal space
(easily fit in 80 columns, maybe with some indentation).
See more details on the proper patch format in the following
references.
13) More references for submitting patches
Andrew Morton, "The perfect patch" (tpp).
<http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/stuff/tpp.txt>
Jeff Garzik, "Linux kernel patch submission format."
<http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html>
Greg KH, "How to piss off a kernel subsystem maintainer"
<http://www.kroah.com/log/2005/03/31/>
Kernel Documentation/CodingStyle
<http://sosdg.org/~coywolf/lxr/source/Documentation/CodingStyle>
Linus Torvald's mail on the canonical patch format:
<http://lkml.org/lkml/2005/4/7/183>
-----------------------------------
@ -466,3 +466,31 @@ and 'extern __inline__'.
Don't try to anticipate nebulous future cases which may or may not
be useful: "Make it as simple as you can, and no simpler."
----------------------
SECTION 3 - REFERENCES
----------------------
Andrew Morton, "The perfect patch" (tpp).
<http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/stuff/tpp.txt>
Jeff Garzik, "Linux kernel patch submission format."
<http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html>
Greg Kroah-Hartman "How to piss off a kernel subsystem maintainer".
<http://www.kroah.com/log/2005/03/31/>
<http://www.kroah.com/log/2005/07/08/>
<http://www.kroah.com/log/2005/10/19/>
<http://www.kroah.com/log/2006/01/11/>
NO!!!! No more huge patch bombs to linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org people!.
<http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=linux-kernel&m=112112749912944&w=2>
Kernel Documentation/CodingStyle
<http://sosdg.org/~coywolf/lxr/source/Documentation/CodingStyle>
Linus Torvald's mail on the canonical patch format:
<http://lkml.org/lkml/2005/4/7/183>
--
Last updated on 17 Nov 2005.

81
Documentation/applying-patches.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -2,8 +2,8 @@
Applying Patches To The Linux Kernel
------------------------------------
(Written by Jesper Juhl, August 2005)
Original by: Jesper Juhl, August 2005
Last update: 2006-01-05
A frequently asked question on the Linux Kernel Mailing List is how to apply
@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ instead:
If you wish to uncompress the patch file by hand first before applying it
(what I assume you've done in the examples below), then you simply run
gunzip or bunzip2 on the file - like this:
gunzip or bunzip2 on the file -- like this:
gunzip patch-x.y.z.gz
bunzip2 patch-x.y.z.bz2
@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Common errors when patching
---
When patch applies a patch file it attempts to verify the sanity of the
file in different ways.
Checking that the file looks like a valid patch file, checking the code
Checking that the file looks like a valid patch file & checking the code
around the bits being modified matches the context provided in the patch are
just two of the basic sanity checks patch does.
@ -118,16 +118,16 @@ wrong.
When patch encounters a change that it can't fix up with fuzz it rejects it
outright and leaves a file with a .rej extension (a reject file). You can
read this file to see exactely what change couldn't be applied, so you can
read this file to see exactly what change couldn't be applied, so you can
go fix it up by hand if you wish.
If you don't have any third party patches applied to your kernel source, but
If you don't have any third-party patches applied to your kernel source, but
only patches from kernel.org and you apply the patches in the correct order,
and have made no modifications yourself to the source files, then you should
never see a fuzz or reject message from patch. If you do see such messages
anyway, then there's a high risk that either your local source tree or the
patch file is corrupted in some way. In that case you should probably try
redownloading the patch and if things are still not OK then you'd be advised
re-downloading the patch and if things are still not OK then you'd be advised
to start with a fresh tree downloaded in full from kernel.org.
Let's look a bit more at some of the messages patch can produce.
@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ If patch stops and presents a "File to patch:" prompt, then patch could not
find a file to be patched. Most likely you forgot to specify -p1 or you are
in the wrong directory. Less often, you'll find patches that need to be
applied with -p0 instead of -p1 (reading the patch file should reveal if
this is the case - if so, then this is an error by the person who created
this is the case -- if so, then this is an error by the person who created
the patch but is not fatal).
If you get "Hunk #2 succeeded at 1887 with fuzz 2 (offset 7 lines)." or a
@ -167,22 +167,28 @@ the patch will in fact apply it.
A message similar to "patch: **** unexpected end of file in patch" or "patch
unexpectedly ends in middle of line" means that patch could make no sense of
the file you fed to it. Either your download is broken or you tried to feed
patch a compressed patch file without uncompressing it first.
the file you fed to it. Either your download is broken, you tried to feed
patch a compressed patch file without uncompressing it first, or the patch
file that you are using has been mangled by a mail client or mail transfer
agent along the way somewhere, e.g., by splitting a long line into two lines.
Often these warnings can easily be fixed by joining (concatenating) the
two lines that had been split.
As I already mentioned above, these errors should never happen if you apply
a patch from kernel.org to the correct version of an unmodified source tree.
So if you get these errors with kernel.org patches then you should probably
assume that either your patch file or your tree is broken and I'd advice you
assume that either your patch file or your tree is broken and I'd advise you
to start over with a fresh download of a full kernel tree and the patch you
wish to apply.
Are there any alternatives to `patch'?
---
Yes there are alternatives. You can use the `interdiff' program
(http://cyberelk.net/tim/patchutils/) to generate a patch representing the
differences between two patches and then apply the result.
Yes there are alternatives.
You can use the `interdiff' program (http://cyberelk.net/tim/patchutils/) to
generate a patch representing the differences between two patches and then
apply the result.
This will let you move from something like 2.6.12.2 to 2.6.12.3 in a single
step. The -z flag to interdiff will even let you feed it patches in gzip or
bzip2 compressed form directly without the use of zcat or bzcat or manual
@ -197,10 +203,10 @@ do the additional steps since interdiff can get things wrong in some cases.
Another alternative is `ketchup', which is a python script for automatic
downloading and applying of patches (http://www.selenic.com/ketchup/).
Other nice tools are diffstat which shows a summary of changes made by a
patch, lsdiff which displays a short listing of affected files in a patch
file, along with (optionally) the line numbers of the start of each patch
and grepdiff which displays a list of the files modified by a patch where
Other nice tools are diffstat, which shows a summary of changes made by a
patch; lsdiff, which displays a short listing of affected files in a patch
file, along with (optionally) the line numbers of the start of each patch;
and grepdiff, which displays a list of the files modified by a patch where
the patch contains a given regular expression.
@ -225,8 +231,8 @@ The -mm kernels live at
In place of ftp.kernel.org you can use ftp.cc.kernel.org, where cc is a
country code. This way you'll be downloading from a mirror site that's most
likely geographically closer to you, resulting in faster downloads for you,
less bandwidth used globally and less load on the main kernel.org servers -
these are good things, do use mirrors when possible.
less bandwidth used globally and less load on the main kernel.org servers --
these are good things, so do use mirrors when possible.
The 2.6.x kernels
@ -234,14 +240,14 @@ The 2.6.x kernels
These are the base stable releases released by Linus. The highest numbered
release is the most recent.
If regressions or other serious flaws are found then a -stable fix patch
If regressions or other serious flaws are found, then a -stable fix patch
will be released (see below) on top of this base. Once a new 2.6.x base
kernel is released, a patch is made available that is a delta between the
previous 2.6.x kernel and the new one.
To apply a patch moving from 2.6.11 to 2.6.12 you'd do the following (note
To apply a patch moving from 2.6.11 to 2.6.12, you'd do the following (note
that such patches do *NOT* apply on top of 2.6.x.y kernels but on top of the
base 2.6.x kernel - if you need to move from 2.6.x.y to 2.6.x+1 you need to
base 2.6.x kernel -- if you need to move from 2.6.x.y to 2.6.x+1 you need to
first revert the 2.6.x.y patch).
Here are some examples:
@ -258,12 +264,12 @@ $ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-2.6.11.1 # revert the 2.6.11.1 patch
# source dir is now 2.6.11
$ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.12 # apply new 2.6.12 patch
$ cd ..
$ mv linux-2.6.11.1 inux-2.6.12 # rename source dir
$ mv linux-2.6.11.1 linux-2.6.12 # rename source dir
The 2.6.x.y kernels
---
Kernels with 4 digit versions are -stable kernels. They contain small(ish)
Kernels with 4-digit versions are -stable kernels. They contain small(ish)
critical fixes for security problems or significant regressions discovered
in a given 2.6.x kernel.
@ -274,9 +280,14 @@ versions.
If no 2.6.x.y kernel is available, then the highest numbered 2.6.x kernel is
the current stable kernel.
note: the -stable team usually do make incremental patches available as well
as patches against the latest mainline release, but I only cover the
non-incremental ones below. The incremental ones can be found at
ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/v2.6/incr/
These patches are not incremental, meaning that for example the 2.6.12.3
patch does not apply on top of the 2.6.12.2 kernel source, but rather on top
of the base 2.6.12 kernel source.
of the base 2.6.12 kernel source .
So, in order to apply the 2.6.12.3 patch to your existing 2.6.12.2 kernel
source you have to first back out the 2.6.12.2 patch (so you are left with a
base 2.6.12 kernel source) and then apply the new 2.6.12.3 patch.
@ -342,12 +353,12 @@ The -git kernels
repository, hence the name).
These patches are usually released daily and represent the current state of
Linus' tree. They are more experimental than -rc kernels since they are
Linus's tree. They are more experimental than -rc kernels since they are
generated automatically without even a cursory glance to see if they are
sane.
-git patches are not incremental and apply either to a base 2.6.x kernel or
a base 2.6.x-rc kernel - you can see which from their name.
a base 2.6.x-rc kernel -- you can see which from their name.
A patch named 2.6.12-git1 applies to the 2.6.12 kernel source and a patch
named 2.6.13-rc3-git2 applies to the source of the 2.6.13-rc3 kernel.
@ -390,12 +401,12 @@ You should generally strive to get your patches into mainline via -mm to
ensure maximum testing.
This branch is in constant flux and contains many experimental features, a
lot of debugging patches not appropriate for mainline etc and is the most
lot of debugging patches not appropriate for mainline etc., and is the most
experimental of the branches described in this document.
These kernels are not appropriate for use on systems that are supposed to be
stable and they are more risky to run than any of the other branches (make
sure you have up-to-date backups - that goes for any experimental kernel but
sure you have up-to-date backups -- that goes for any experimental kernel but
even more so for -mm kernels).
These kernels in addition to all the other experimental patches they contain
@ -433,7 +444,11 @@ $ cd ..
$ mv linux-2.6.12-mm1 linux-2.6.13-rc3-mm3 # rename the source dir
This concludes this list of explanations of the various kernel trees and I
hope you are now crystal clear on how to apply the various patches and help
testing the kernel.
This concludes this list of explanations of the various kernel trees.
I hope you are now clear on how to apply the various patches and help testing
the kernel.
Thank you's to Randy Dunlap, Rolf Eike Beer, Linus Torvalds, Bodo Eggert,
Johannes Stezenbach, Grant Coady, Pavel Machek and others that I may have
forgotten for their reviews and contributions to this document.

271
Documentation/block/barrier.txt Normal file
Просмотреть файл

@ -0,0 +1,271 @@
I/O Barriers
============
Tejun Heo <htejun@gmail.com>, July 22 2005
I/O barrier requests are used to guarantee ordering around the barrier
requests. Unless you're crazy enough to use disk drives for
implementing synchronization constructs (wow, sounds interesting...),
the ordering is meaningful only for write requests for things like
journal checkpoints. All requests queued before a barrier request
must be finished (made it to the physical medium) before the barrier
request is started, and all requests queued after the barrier request
must be started only after the barrier request is finished (again,
made it to the physical medium).
In other words, I/O barrier requests have the following two properties.
1. Request ordering
Requests cannot pass the barrier request. Preceding requests are
processed before the barrier and following requests after.
Depending on what features a drive supports, this can be done in one
of the following three ways.
i. For devices which have queue depth greater than 1 (TCQ devices) and
support ordered tags, block layer can just issue the barrier as an
ordered request and the lower level driver, controller and drive
itself are responsible for making sure that the ordering contraint is
met. Most modern SCSI controllers/drives should support this.
NOTE: SCSI ordered tag isn't currently used due to limitation in the
SCSI midlayer, see the following random notes section.
ii. For devices which have queue depth greater than 1 but don't
support ordered tags, block layer ensures that the requests preceding
a barrier request finishes before issuing the barrier request. Also,
it defers requests following the barrier until the barrier request is
finished. Older SCSI controllers/drives and SATA drives fall in this
category.
iii. Devices which have queue depth of 1. This is a degenerate case
of ii. Just keeping issue order suffices. Ancient SCSI
controllers/drives and IDE drives are in this category.
2. Forced flushing to physcial medium
Again, if you're not gonna do synchronization with disk drives (dang,
it sounds even more appealing now!), the reason you use I/O barriers
is mainly to protect filesystem integrity when power failure or some
other events abruptly stop the drive from operating and possibly make
the drive lose data in its cache. So, I/O barriers need to guarantee
that requests actually get written to non-volatile medium in order.
There are four cases,
i. No write-back cache. Keeping requests ordered is enough.
ii. Write-back cache but no flush operation. There's no way to
gurantee physical-medium commit order. This kind of devices can't to
I/O barriers.
iii. Write-back cache and flush operation but no FUA (forced unit
access). We need two cache flushes - before and after the barrier
request.
iv. Write-back cache, flush operation and FUA. We still need one
flush to make sure requests preceding a barrier are written to medium,
but post-barrier flush can be avoided by using FUA write on the
barrier itself.
How to support barrier requests in drivers
------------------------------------------
All barrier handling is done inside block layer proper. All low level
drivers have to are implementing its prepare_flush_fn and using one
the following two functions to indicate what barrier type it supports
and how to prepare flush requests. Note that the term 'ordered' is
used to indicate the whole sequence of performing barrier requests
including draining and flushing.
typedef void (prepare_flush_fn)(request_queue_t *q, struct request *rq);
int blk_queue_ordered(request_queue_t *q, unsigned ordered,
prepare_flush_fn *prepare_flush_fn,
unsigned gfp_mask);
int blk_queue_ordered_locked(request_queue_t *q, unsigned ordered,
prepare_flush_fn *prepare_flush_fn,
unsigned gfp_mask);
The only difference between the two functions is whether or not the
caller is holding q->queue_lock on entry. The latter expects the
caller is holding the lock.
@q : the queue in question
@ordered : the ordered mode the driver/device supports
@prepare_flush_fn : this function should prepare @rq such that it
flushes cache to physical medium when executed
@gfp_mask : gfp_mask used when allocating data structures
for ordered processing
For example, SCSI disk driver's prepare_flush_fn looks like the
following.
static void sd_prepare_flush(request_queue_t *q, struct request *rq)
{
memset(rq->cmd, 0, sizeof(rq->cmd));
rq->flags |= REQ_BLOCK_PC;
rq->timeout = SD_TIMEOUT;
rq->cmd[0] = SYNCHRONIZE_CACHE;
}
The following seven ordered modes are supported. The following table
shows which mode should be used depending on what features a
device/driver supports. In the leftmost column of table,
QUEUE_ORDERED_ prefix is omitted from the mode names to save space.
The table is followed by description of each mode. Note that in the
descriptions of QUEUE_ORDERED_DRAIN*, '=>' is used whereas '->' is
used for QUEUE_ORDERED_TAG* descriptions. '=>' indicates that the
preceding step must be complete before proceeding to the next step.
'->' indicates that the next step can start as soon as the previous
step is issued.
write-back cache ordered tag flush FUA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
NONE yes/no N/A no N/A
DRAIN no no N/A N/A
DRAIN_FLUSH yes no yes no
DRAIN_FUA yes no yes yes
TAG no yes N/A N/A
TAG_FLUSH yes yes yes no
TAG_FUA yes yes yes yes
QUEUE_ORDERED_NONE
I/O barriers are not needed and/or supported.
Sequence: N/A
QUEUE_ORDERED_DRAIN
Requests are ordered by draining the request queue and cache
flushing isn't needed.
Sequence: drain => barrier
QUEUE_ORDERED_DRAIN_FLUSH
Requests are ordered by draining the request queue and both
pre-barrier and post-barrier cache flushings are needed.
Sequence: drain => preflush => barrier => postflush
QUEUE_ORDERED_DRAIN_FUA
Requests are ordered by draining the request queue and
pre-barrier cache flushing is needed. By using FUA on barrier
request, post-barrier flushing can be skipped.
Sequence: drain => preflush => barrier
QUEUE_ORDERED_TAG
Requests are ordered by ordered tag and cache flushing isn't
needed.
Sequence: barrier
QUEUE_ORDERED_TAG_FLUSH
Requests are ordered by ordered tag and both pre-barrier and
post-barrier cache flushings are needed.
Sequence: preflush -> barrier -> postflush
QUEUE_ORDERED_TAG_FUA
Requests are ordered by ordered tag and pre-barrier cache
flushing is needed. By using FUA on barrier request,
post-barrier flushing can be skipped.
Sequence: preflush -> barrier
Random notes/caveats
--------------------
* SCSI layer currently can't use TAG ordering even if the drive,
controller and driver support it. The problem is that SCSI midlayer
request dispatch function is not atomic. It releases queue lock and
switch to SCSI host lock during issue and it's possible and likely to
happen in time that requests change their relative positions. Once
this problem is solved, TAG ordering can be enabled.
* Currently, no matter which ordered mode is used, there can be only
one barrier request in progress. All I/O barriers are held off by
block layer until the previous I/O barrier is complete. This doesn't
make any difference for DRAIN ordered devices, but, for TAG ordered
devices with very high command latency, passing multiple I/O barriers
to low level *might* be helpful if they are very frequent. Well, this
certainly is a non-issue. I'm writing this just to make clear that no
two I/O barrier is ever passed to low-level driver.
* Completion order. Requests in ordered sequence are issued in order
but not required to finish in order. Barrier implementation can
handle out-of-order completion of ordered sequence. IOW, the requests
MUST be processed in order but the hardware/software completion paths
are allowed to reorder completion notifications - eg. current SCSI
midlayer doesn't preserve completion order during error handling.
* Requeueing order. Low-level drivers are free to requeue any request
after they removed it from the request queue with
blkdev_dequeue_request(). As barrier sequence should be kept in order
when requeued, generic elevator code takes care of putting requests in
order around barrier. See blk_ordered_req_seq() and
ELEVATOR_INSERT_REQUEUE handling in __elv_add_request() for details.
Note that block drivers must not requeue preceding requests while
completing latter requests in an ordered sequence. Currently, no
error checking is done against this.
* Error handling. Currently, block layer will report error to upper
layer if any of requests in an ordered sequence fails. Unfortunately,
this doesn't seem to be enough. Look at the following request flow.
QUEUE_ORDERED_TAG_FLUSH is in use.
[0] [1] [2] [3] [pre] [barrier] [post] < [4] [5] [6] ... >
still in elevator
Let's say request [2], [3] are write requests to update file system
metadata (journal or whatever) and [barrier] is used to mark that
those updates are valid. Consider the following sequence.
i. Requests [0] ~ [post] leaves the request queue and enters
low-level driver.
ii. After a while, unfortunately, something goes wrong and the
drive fails [2]. Note that any of [0], [1] and [3] could have
completed by this time, but [pre] couldn't have been finished
as the drive must process it in order and it failed before
processing that command.
iii. Error handling kicks in and determines that the error is
unrecoverable and fails [2], and resumes operation.
iv. [pre] [barrier] [post] gets processed.
v. *BOOM* power fails
The problem here is that the barrier request is *supposed* to indicate
that filesystem update requests [2] and [3] made it safely to the
physical medium and, if the machine crashes after the barrier is
written, filesystem recovery code can depend on that. Sadly, that
isn't true in this case anymore. IOW, the success of a I/O barrier
should also be dependent on success of some of the preceding requests,
where only upper layer (filesystem) knows what 'some' is.
This can be solved by implementing a way to tell the block layer which
requests affect the success of the following barrier request and
making lower lever drivers to resume operation on error only after
block layer tells it to do so.
As the probability of this happening is very low and the drive should
be faulty, implementing the fix is probably an overkill. But, still,
it's there.
* In previous drafts of barrier implementation, there was fallback
mechanism such that, if FUA or ordered TAG fails, less fancy ordered
mode can be selected and the failed barrier request is retried
automatically. The rationale for this feature was that as FUA is
pretty new in ATA world and ordered tag was never used widely, there
could be devices which report to support those features but choke when
actually given such requests.
This was removed for two reasons 1. it's an overkill 2. it's
impossible to implement properly when TAG ordering is used as low
level drivers resume after an error automatically. If it's ever
needed adding it back and modifying low level drivers accordingly
shouldn't be difficult.

12
Documentation/block/biodoc.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ The following people helped with review comments and inputs for this
document:
Christoph Hellwig <hch@infradead.org>
Arjan van de Ven <arjanv@redhat.com>
Randy Dunlap <rddunlap@osdl.org>
Randy Dunlap <rdunlap@xenotime.net>
Andre Hedrick <andre@linux-ide.org>
The following people helped with fixes/contributions to the bio patches
@ -263,14 +263,8 @@ A flag in the bio structure, BIO_BARRIER is used to identify a barrier i/o.
The generic i/o scheduler would make sure that it places the barrier request and
all other requests coming after it after all the previous requests in the
queue. Barriers may be implemented in different ways depending on the
driver. A SCSI driver for example could make use of ordered tags to
preserve the necessary ordering with a lower impact on throughput. For IDE
this might be two sync cache flush: a pre and post flush when encountering
a barrier write.
There is a provision for queues to indicate what kind of barriers they
can provide. This is as of yet unmerged, details will be added here once it
is in the kernel.
driver. For more details regarding I/O barriers, please read barrier.txt
in this directory.
1.2.2 Request Priority/Latency

82
Documentation/block/stat.txt Normal file
Просмотреть файл

@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
Block layer statistics in /sys/block/<dev>/stat
===============================================
This file documents the contents of the /sys/block/<dev>/stat file.
The stat file provides several statistics about the state of block
device <dev>.
Q. Why are there multiple statistics in a single file? Doesn't sysfs
normally contain a single value per file?
A. By having a single file, the kernel can guarantee that the statistics
represent a consistent snapshot of the state of the device. If the
statistics were exported as multiple files containing one statistic
each, it would be impossible to guarantee that a set of readings
represent a single point in time.
The stat file consists of a single line of text containing 11 decimal
values separated by whitespace. The fields are summarized in the
following table, and described in more detail below.
Name units description
---- ----- -----------
read I/Os requests number of read I/Os processed
read merges requests number of read I/Os merged with in-queue I/O
read sectors sectors number of sectors read
read ticks milliseconds total wait time for read requests
write I/Os requests number of write I/Os processed
write merges requests number of write I/Os merged with in-queue I/O
write sectors sectors number of sectors written
write ticks milliseconds total wait time for write requests
in_flight requests number of I/Os currently in flight
io_ticks milliseconds total time this block device has been active
time_in_queue milliseconds total wait time for all requests
read I/Os, write I/Os
=====================
These values increment when an I/O request completes.
read merges, write merges
=========================
These values increment when an I/O request is merged with an
already-queued I/O request.
read sectors, write sectors
===========================
These values count the number of sectors read from or written to this
block device. The "sectors" in question are the standard UNIX 512-byte
sectors, not any device- or filesystem-specific block size. The
counters are incremented when the I/O completes.
read ticks, write ticks
=======================
These values count the number of milliseconds that I/O requests have
waited on this block device. If there are multiple I/O requests waiting,
these values will increase at a rate greater than 1000/second; for
example, if 60 read requests wait for an average of 30 ms, the read_ticks
field will increase by 60*30 = 1800.
in_flight
=========
This value counts the number of I/O requests that have been issued to
the device driver but have not yet completed. It does not include I/O
requests that are in the queue but not yet issued to the device driver.
io_ticks
========
This value counts the number of milliseconds during which the device has
had I/O requests queued.
time_in_queue
=============
This value counts the number of milliseconds that I/O requests have waited
on this block device. If there are multiple I/O requests waiting, this
value will increase as the product of the number of milliseconds times the
number of requests waiting (see "read ticks" above for an example).

2
Documentation/cachetlb.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ changes occur:
8) void lazy_mmu_prot_update(pte_t pte)
This interface is called whenever the protection on
any user PTEs change. This interface provides a notification
to architecture specific code to take appropiate action.
to architecture specific code to take appropriate action.
Next, we have the cache flushing interfaces. In general, when Linux

58
Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -27,6 +27,7 @@ Contents:
2.2 Powersave
2.3 Userspace
2.4 Ondemand
2.5 Conservative
3. The Governor Interface in the CPUfreq Core
@ -110,9 +111,64 @@ directory.
The CPUfreq govenor "ondemand" sets the CPU depending on the
current usage. To do this the CPU must have the capability to
switch the frequency very fast.
switch the frequency very quickly. There are a number of sysfs file
accessible parameters:
sampling_rate: measured in uS (10^-6 seconds), this is how often you
want the kernel to look at the CPU usage and to make decisions on
what to do about the frequency. Typically this is set to values of
around '10000' or more.
show_sampling_rate_(min|max): the minimum and maximum sampling rates
available that you may set 'sampling_rate' to.
up_threshold: defines what the average CPU usaged between the samplings
of 'sampling_rate' needs to be for the kernel to make a decision on
whether it should increase the frequency. For example when it is set
to its default value of '80' it means that between the checking
intervals the CPU needs to be on average more than 80% in use to then
decide that the CPU frequency needs to be increased.
sampling_down_factor: this parameter controls the rate that the CPU
makes a decision on when to decrease the frequency. When set to its
default value of '5' it means that at 1/5 the sampling_rate the kernel
makes a decision to lower the frequency. Five "lower rate" decisions
have to be made in a row before the CPU frequency is actually lower.
If set to '1' then the frequency decreases as quickly as it increases,
if set to '2' it decreases at half the rate of the increase.
ignore_nice_load: this parameter takes a value of '0' or '1', when set
to '0' (its default) then all processes are counted towards towards the
'cpu utilisation' value. When set to '1' then processes that are
run with a 'nice' value will not count (and thus be ignored) in the
overal usage calculation. This is useful if you are running a CPU
intensive calculation on your laptop that you do not care how long it
takes to complete as you can 'nice' it and prevent it from taking part
in the deciding process of whether to increase your CPU frequency.
2.5 Conservative
----------------
The CPUfreq governor "conservative", much like the "ondemand"
governor, sets the CPU depending on the current usage. It differs in
behaviour in that it gracefully increases and decreases the CPU speed
rather than jumping to max speed the moment there is any load on the
CPU. This behaviour more suitable in a battery powered environment.
The governor is tweaked in the same manner as the "ondemand" governor
through sysfs with the addition of:
freq_step: this describes what percentage steps the cpu freq should be
increased and decreased smoothly by. By default the cpu frequency will
increase in 5% chunks of your maximum cpu frequency. You can change this
value to anywhere between 0 and 100 where '0' will effectively lock your
CPU at a speed regardless of its load whilst '100' will, in theory, make
it behave identically to the "ondemand" governor.
down_threshold: same as the 'up_threshold' found for the "ondemand"
governor but for the opposite direction. For example when set to its
default value of '20' it means that if the CPU usage needs to be below
20% between samples to have the frequency decreased.
3. The Governor Interface in the CPUfreq Core
=============================================

357
Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt Normal file
Просмотреть файл

@ -0,0 +1,357 @@
CPU hotplug Support in Linux(tm) Kernel
Maintainers:
CPU Hotplug Core:
Rusty Russell <rusty@rustycorp.com.au>
Srivatsa Vaddagiri <vatsa@in.ibm.com>
i386:
Zwane Mwaikambo <zwane@arm.linux.org.uk>
ppc64:
Nathan Lynch <nathanl@austin.ibm.com>
Joel Schopp <jschopp@austin.ibm.com>
ia64/x86_64:
Ashok Raj <ashok.raj@intel.com>
Authors: Ashok Raj <ashok.raj@intel.com>
Lots of feedback: Nathan Lynch <nathanl@austin.ibm.com>,
Joel Schopp <jschopp@austin.ibm.com>
Introduction
Modern advances in system architectures have introduced advanced error
reporting and correction capabilities in processors. CPU architectures permit
partitioning support, where compute resources of a single CPU could be made
available to virtual machine environments. There are couple OEMS that
support NUMA hardware which are hot pluggable as well, where physical
node insertion and removal require support for CPU hotplug.
Such advances require CPUs available to a kernel to be removed either for
provisioning reasons, or for RAS purposes to keep an offending CPU off
system execution path. Hence the need for CPU hotplug support in the
Linux kernel.
A more novel use of CPU-hotplug support is its use today in suspend
resume support for SMP. Dual-core and HT support makes even
a laptop run SMP kernels which didn't support these methods. SMP support
for suspend/resume is a work in progress.
General Stuff about CPU Hotplug
--------------------------------
Command Line Switches
---------------------
maxcpus=n Restrict boot time cpus to n. Say if you have 4 cpus, using
maxcpus=2 will only boot 2. You can choose to bring the
other cpus later online, read FAQ's for more info.
additional_cpus=n [x86_64 only] use this to limit hotpluggable cpus.
This option sets
cpu_possible_map = cpu_present_map + additional_cpus
CPU maps and such
-----------------
[More on cpumaps and primitive to manipulate, please check
include/linux/cpumask.h that has more descriptive text.]
cpu_possible_map: Bitmap of possible CPUs that can ever be available in the
system. This is used to allocate some boot time memory for per_cpu variables
that aren't designed to grow/shrink as CPUs are made available or removed.
Once set during boot time discovery phase, the map is static, i.e no bits
are added or removed anytime. Trimming it accurately for your system needs
upfront can save some boot time memory. See below for how we use heuristics
in x86_64 case to keep this under check.
cpu_online_map: Bitmap of all CPUs currently online. Its set in __cpu_up()
after a cpu is available for kernel scheduling and ready to receive
interrupts from devices. Its cleared when a cpu is brought down using
__cpu_disable(), before which all OS services including interrupts are
migrated to another target CPU.
cpu_present_map: Bitmap of CPUs currently present in the system. Not all
of them may be online. When physical hotplug is processed by the relevant
subsystem (e.g ACPI) can change and new bit either be added or removed
from the map depending on the event is hot-add/hot-remove. There are currently
no locking rules as of now. Typical usage is to init topology during boot,
at which time hotplug is disabled.
You really dont need to manipulate any of the system cpu maps. They should
be read-only for most use. When setting up per-cpu resources almost always use
cpu_possible_map/for_each_cpu() to iterate.
Never use anything other than cpumask_t to represent bitmap of CPUs.
#include <linux/cpumask.h>
for_each_cpu - Iterate over cpu_possible_map
for_each_online_cpu - Iterate over cpu_online_map
for_each_present_cpu - Iterate over cpu_present_map
for_each_cpu_mask(x,mask) - Iterate over some random collection of cpu mask.
#include <linux/cpu.h>
lock_cpu_hotplug() and unlock_cpu_hotplug():
The above calls are used to inhibit cpu hotplug operations. While holding the
cpucontrol mutex, cpu_online_map will not change. If you merely need to avoid
cpus going away, you could also use preempt_disable() and preempt_enable()
for those sections. Just remember the critical section cannot call any
function that can sleep or schedule this process away. The preempt_disable()
will work as long as stop_machine_run() is used to take a cpu down.
CPU Hotplug - Frequently Asked Questions.
Q: How to i enable my kernel to support CPU hotplug?
A: When doing make defconfig, Enable CPU hotplug support
"Processor type and Features" -> Support for Hotpluggable CPUs
Make sure that you have CONFIG_HOTPLUG, and CONFIG_SMP turned on as well.
You would need to enable CONFIG_HOTPLUG_CPU for SMP suspend/resume support
as well.
Q: What architectures support CPU hotplug?
A: As of 2.6.14, the following architectures support CPU hotplug.
i386 (Intel), ppc, ppc64, parisc, s390, ia64 and x86_64
Q: How to test if hotplug is supported on the newly built kernel?
A: You should now notice an entry in sysfs.
Check if sysfs is mounted, using the "mount" command. You should notice
an entry as shown below in the output.
....
none on /sys type sysfs (rw)
....
if this is not mounted, do the following.
#mkdir /sysfs
#mount -t sysfs sys /sys
now you should see entries for all present cpu, the following is an example
in a 8-way system.
#pwd
#/sys/devices/system/cpu
#ls -l
total 0
drwxr-xr-x 10 root root 0 Sep 19 07:44 .
drwxr-xr-x 13 root root 0 Sep 19 07:45 ..
drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 Sep 19 07:44 cpu0
drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 Sep 19 07:44 cpu1
drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 Sep 19 07:44 cpu2
drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 Sep 19 07:44 cpu3
drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 Sep 19 07:44 cpu4
drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 Sep 19 07:44 cpu5
drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 Sep 19 07:44 cpu6
drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 Sep 19 07:48 cpu7
Under each directory you would find an "online" file which is the control
file to logically online/offline a processor.
Q: Does hot-add/hot-remove refer to physical add/remove of cpus?
A: The usage of hot-add/remove may not be very consistently used in the code.
CONFIG_CPU_HOTPLUG enables logical online/offline capability in the kernel.
To support physical addition/removal, one would need some BIOS hooks and
the platform should have something like an attention button in PCI hotplug.
CONFIG_ACPI_HOTPLUG_CPU enables ACPI support for physical add/remove of CPUs.
Q: How do i logically offline a CPU?
A: Do the following.
#echo 0 > /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/online
once the logical offline is successful, check
#cat /proc/interrupts
you should now not see the CPU that you removed. Also online file will report
the state as 0 when a cpu if offline and 1 when its online.
#To display the current cpu state.
#cat /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/online
Q: Why cant i remove CPU0 on some systems?
A: Some architectures may have some special dependency on a certain CPU.
For e.g in IA64 platforms we have ability to sent platform interrupts to the
OS. a.k.a Corrected Platform Error Interrupts (CPEI). In current ACPI
specifications, we didn't have a way to change the target CPU. Hence if the
current ACPI version doesn't support such re-direction, we disable that CPU
by making it not-removable.
In such cases you will also notice that the online file is missing under cpu0.
Q: How do i find out if a particular CPU is not removable?
A: Depending on the implementation, some architectures may show this by the
absence of the "online" file. This is done if it can be determined ahead of
time that this CPU cannot be removed.
In some situations, this can be a run time check, i.e if you try to remove the
last CPU, this will not be permitted. You can find such failures by
investigating the return value of the "echo" command.
Q: What happens when a CPU is being logically offlined?
A: The following happen, listed in no particular order :-)
- A notification is sent to in-kernel registered modules by sending an event
CPU_DOWN_PREPARE
- All process is migrated away from this outgoing CPU to a new CPU
- All interrupts targeted to this CPU is migrated to a new CPU
- timers/bottom half/task lets are also migrated to a new CPU
- Once all services are migrated, kernel calls an arch specific routine
__cpu_disable() to perform arch specific cleanup.
- Once this is successful, an event for successful cleanup is sent by an event
CPU_DEAD.
"It is expected that each service cleans up when the CPU_DOWN_PREPARE
notifier is called, when CPU_DEAD is called its expected there is nothing
running on behalf of this CPU that was offlined"
Q: If i have some kernel code that needs to be aware of CPU arrival and
departure, how to i arrange for proper notification?
A: This is what you would need in your kernel code to receive notifications.
#include <linux/cpu.h>
static int __cpuinit foobar_cpu_callback(struct notifier_block *nfb,
unsigned long action, void *hcpu)
{
unsigned int cpu = (unsigned long)hcpu;
switch (action) {
case CPU_ONLINE:
foobar_online_action(cpu);
break;
case CPU_DEAD:
foobar_dead_action(cpu);
break;
}
return NOTIFY_OK;
}
static struct notifier_block foobar_cpu_notifer =
{
.notifier_call = foobar_cpu_callback,
};
In your init function,
register_cpu_notifier(&foobar_cpu_notifier);
You can fail PREPARE notifiers if something doesn't work to prepare resources.
This will stop the activity and send a following CANCELED event back.
CPU_DEAD should not be failed, its just a goodness indication, but bad
things will happen if a notifier in path sent a BAD notify code.
Q: I don't see my action being called for all CPUs already up and running?
A: Yes, CPU notifiers are called only when new CPUs are on-lined or offlined.
If you need to perform some action for each cpu already in the system, then
for_each_online_cpu(i) {
foobar_cpu_callback(&foobar_cpu_notifier, CPU_UP_PREPARE, i);
foobar_cpu_callback(&foobar-cpu_notifier, CPU_ONLINE, i);
}
Q: If i would like to develop cpu hotplug support for a new architecture,
what do i need at a minimum?
A: The following are what is required for CPU hotplug infrastructure to work
correctly.
- Make sure you have an entry in Kconfig to enable CONFIG_HOTPLUG_CPU
- __cpu_up() - Arch interface to bring up a CPU
- __cpu_disable() - Arch interface to shutdown a CPU, no more interrupts
can be handled by the kernel after the routine
returns. Including local APIC timers etc are
shutdown.
- __cpu_die() - This actually supposed to ensure death of the CPU.
Actually look at some example code in other arch
that implement CPU hotplug. The processor is taken
down from the idle() loop for that specific
architecture. __cpu_die() typically waits for some
per_cpu state to be set, to ensure the processor
dead routine is called to be sure positively.
Q: I need to ensure that a particular cpu is not removed when there is some
work specific to this cpu is in progress.
A: First switch the current thread context to preferred cpu
int my_func_on_cpu(int cpu)
{
cpumask_t saved_mask, new_mask = CPU_MASK_NONE;
int curr_cpu, err = 0;
saved_mask = current->cpus_allowed;
cpu_set(cpu, new_mask);
err = set_cpus_allowed(current, new_mask);
if (err)
return err;
/*
* If we got scheduled out just after the return from
* set_cpus_allowed() before running the work, this ensures
* we stay locked.
*/
curr_cpu = get_cpu();
if (curr_cpu != cpu) {
err = -EAGAIN;
goto ret;
} else {
/*
* Do work : But cant sleep, since get_cpu() disables preempt
*/
}
ret:
put_cpu();
set_cpus_allowed(current, saved_mask);
return err;
}
Q: How do we determine how many CPUs are available for hotplug.
A: There is no clear spec defined way from ACPI that can give us that
information today. Based on some input from Natalie of Unisys,
that the ACPI MADT (Multiple APIC Description Tables) marks those possible
CPUs in a system with disabled status.
Andi implemented some simple heuristics that count the number of disabled
CPUs in MADT as hotpluggable CPUS. In the case there are no disabled CPUS
we assume 1/2 the number of CPUs currently present can be hotplugged.
Caveat: Today's ACPI MADT can only provide 256 entries since the apicid field
in MADT is only 8 bits.
User Space Notification
Hotplug support for devices is common in Linux today. Its being used today to
support automatic configuration of network, usb and pci devices. A hotplug
event can be used to invoke an agent script to perform the configuration task.
You can add /etc/hotplug/cpu.agent to handle hotplug notification user space
scripts.
#!/bin/bash
# $Id: cpu.agent
# Kernel hotplug params include:
#ACTION=%s [online or offline]
#DEVPATH=%s
#
cd /etc/hotplug
. ./hotplug.functions
case $ACTION in
online)
echo `date` ":cpu.agent" add cpu >> /tmp/hotplug.txt
;;
offline)
echo `date` ":cpu.agent" remove cpu >>/tmp/hotplug.txt
;;
*)
debug_mesg CPU $ACTION event not supported
exit 1
;;
esac

165
Documentation/cpusets.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -14,7 +14,10 @@ CONTENTS:
1.1 What are cpusets ?
1.2 Why are cpusets needed ?
1.3 How are cpusets implemented ?
1.4 How do I use cpusets ?
1.4 What are exclusive cpusets ?
1.5 What does notify_on_release do ?
1.6 What is memory_pressure ?
1.7 How do I use cpusets ?
2. Usage Examples and Syntax
2.1 Basic Usage
2.2 Adding/removing cpus
@ -49,29 +52,6 @@ its cpus_allowed vector, and the kernel page allocator will not
allocate a page on a node that is not allowed in the requesting tasks
mems_allowed vector.
If a cpuset is cpu or mem exclusive, no other cpuset, other than a direct
ancestor or descendent, may share any of the same CPUs or Memory Nodes.
A cpuset that is cpu exclusive has a sched domain associated with it.
The sched domain consists of all cpus in the current cpuset that are not
part of any exclusive child cpusets.
This ensures that the scheduler load balacing code only balances
against the cpus that are in the sched domain as defined above and not
all of the cpus in the system. This removes any overhead due to
load balancing code trying to pull tasks outside of the cpu exclusive
cpuset only to be prevented by the tasks' cpus_allowed mask.
A cpuset that is mem_exclusive restricts kernel allocations for
page, buffer and other data commonly shared by the kernel across
multiple users. All cpusets, whether mem_exclusive or not, restrict
allocations of memory for user space. This enables configuring a
system so that several independent jobs can share common kernel
data, such as file system pages, while isolating each jobs user
allocation in its own cpuset. To do this, construct a large
mem_exclusive cpuset to hold all the jobs, and construct child,
non-mem_exclusive cpusets for each individual job. Only a small
amount of typical kernel memory, such as requests from interrupt
handlers, is allowed to be taken outside even a mem_exclusive cpuset.
User level code may create and destroy cpusets by name in the cpuset
virtual file system, manage the attributes and permissions of these
cpusets and which CPUs and Memory Nodes are assigned to each cpuset,
@ -155,7 +135,7 @@ Cpusets extends these two mechanisms as follows:
The implementation of cpusets requires a few, simple hooks
into the rest of the kernel, none in performance critical paths:
- in main/init.c, to initialize the root cpuset at system boot.
- in init/main.c, to initialize the root cpuset at system boot.
- in fork and exit, to attach and detach a task from its cpuset.
- in sched_setaffinity, to mask the requested CPUs by what's
allowed in that tasks cpuset.
@ -166,7 +146,7 @@ into the rest of the kernel, none in performance critical paths:
and related changes in both sched.c and arch/ia64/kernel/domain.c
- in the mbind and set_mempolicy system calls, to mask the requested
Memory Nodes by what's allowed in that tasks cpuset.
- in page_alloc, to restrict memory to allowed nodes.
- in page_alloc.c, to restrict memory to allowed nodes.
- in vmscan.c, to restrict page recovery to the current cpuset.
In addition a new file system, of type "cpuset" may be mounted,
@ -192,9 +172,15 @@ containing the following files describing that cpuset:
- cpus: list of CPUs in that cpuset
- mems: list of Memory Nodes in that cpuset
- memory_migrate flag: if set, move pages to cpusets nodes
- cpu_exclusive flag: is cpu placement exclusive?
- mem_exclusive flag: is memory placement exclusive?
- tasks: list of tasks (by pid) attached to that cpuset
- notify_on_release flag: run /sbin/cpuset_release_agent on exit?
- memory_pressure: measure of how much paging pressure in cpuset
In addition, the root cpuset only has the following file:
- memory_pressure_enabled flag: compute memory_pressure?
New cpusets are created using the mkdir system call or shell
command. The properties of a cpuset, such as its flags, allowed
@ -228,7 +214,108 @@ exclusive cpuset. Also, the use of a Linux virtual file system (vfs)
to represent the cpuset hierarchy provides for a familiar permission
and name space for cpusets, with a minimum of additional kernel code.
1.4 How do I use cpusets ?
1.4 What are exclusive cpusets ?
--------------------------------
If a cpuset is cpu or mem exclusive, no other cpuset, other than
a direct ancestor or descendent, may share any of the same CPUs or
Memory Nodes.
A cpuset that is cpu_exclusive has a scheduler (sched) domain
associated with it. The sched domain consists of all CPUs in the
current cpuset that are not part of any exclusive child cpusets.
This ensures that the scheduler load balancing code only balances
against the CPUs that are in the sched domain as defined above and
not all of the CPUs in the system. This removes any overhead due to
load balancing code trying to pull tasks outside of the cpu_exclusive
cpuset only to be prevented by the tasks' cpus_allowed mask.
A cpuset that is mem_exclusive restricts kernel allocations for
page, buffer and other data commonly shared by the kernel across
multiple users. All cpusets, whether mem_exclusive or not, restrict
allocations of memory for user space. This enables configuring a
system so that several independent jobs can share common kernel data,
such as file system pages, while isolating each jobs user allocation in
its own cpuset. To do this, construct a large mem_exclusive cpuset to
hold all the jobs, and construct child, non-mem_exclusive cpusets for
each individual job. Only a small amount of typical kernel memory,
such as requests from interrupt handlers, is allowed to be taken
outside even a mem_exclusive cpuset.
1.5 What does notify_on_release do ?
------------------------------------
If the notify_on_release flag is enabled (1) in a cpuset, then whenever
the last task in the cpuset leaves (exits or attaches to some other
cpuset) and the last child cpuset of that cpuset is removed, then
the kernel runs the command /sbin/cpuset_release_agent, supplying the
pathname (relative to the mount point of the cpuset file system) of the
abandoned cpuset. This enables automatic removal of abandoned cpusets.
The default value of notify_on_release in the root cpuset at system
boot is disabled (0). The default value of other cpusets at creation
is the current value of their parents notify_on_release setting.
1.6 What is memory_pressure ?
-----------------------------
The memory_pressure of a cpuset provides a simple per-cpuset metric
of the rate that the tasks in a cpuset are attempting to free up in
use memory on the nodes of the cpuset to satisfy additional memory
requests.
This enables batch managers monitoring jobs running in dedicated
cpusets to efficiently detect what level of memory pressure that job
is causing.
This is useful both on tightly managed systems running a wide mix of
submitted jobs, which may choose to terminate or re-prioritize jobs that
are trying to use more memory than allowed on the nodes assigned them,
and with tightly coupled, long running, massively parallel scientific
computing jobs that will dramatically fail to meet required performance
goals if they start to use more memory than allowed to them.
This mechanism provides a very economical way for the batch manager
to monitor a cpuset for signs of memory pressure. It's up to the
batch manager or other user code to decide what to do about it and
take action.
==> Unless this feature is enabled by writing "1" to the special file
/dev/cpuset/memory_pressure_enabled, the hook in the rebalance
code of __alloc_pages() for this metric reduces to simply noticing
that the cpuset_memory_pressure_enabled flag is zero. So only
systems that enable this feature will compute the metric.
Why a per-cpuset, running average:
Because this meter is per-cpuset, rather than per-task or mm,
the system load imposed by a batch scheduler monitoring this
metric is sharply reduced on large systems, because a scan of
the tasklist can be avoided on each set of queries.
Because this meter is a running average, instead of an accumulating
counter, a batch scheduler can detect memory pressure with a
single read, instead of having to read and accumulate results
for a period of time.
Because this meter is per-cpuset rather than per-task or mm,
the batch scheduler can obtain the key information, memory
pressure in a cpuset, with a single read, rather than having to
query and accumulate results over all the (dynamically changing)
set of tasks in the cpuset.
A per-cpuset simple digital filter (requires a spinlock and 3 words
of data per-cpuset) is kept, and updated by any task attached to that
cpuset, if it enters the synchronous (direct) page reclaim code.
A per-cpuset file provides an integer number representing the recent
(half-life of 10 seconds) rate of direct page reclaims caused by
the tasks in the cpuset, in units of reclaims attempted per second,
times 1000.
1.7 How do I use cpusets ?
--------------------------
In order to minimize the impact of cpusets on critical kernel
@ -277,6 +364,30 @@ rewritten to the 'tasks' file of its cpuset. This is done to avoid
impacting the scheduler code in the kernel with a check for changes
in a tasks processor placement.
Normally, once a page is allocated (given a physical page
of main memory) then that page stays on whatever node it
was allocated, so long as it remains allocated, even if the
cpusets memory placement policy 'mems' subsequently changes.
If the cpuset flag file 'memory_migrate' is set true, then when
tasks are attached to that cpuset, any pages that task had
allocated to it on nodes in its previous cpuset are migrated
to the tasks new cpuset. Depending on the implementation,
this migration may either be done by swapping the page out,
so that the next time the page is referenced, it will be paged
into the tasks new cpuset, usually on the node where it was
referenced, or this migration may be done by directly copying
the pages from the tasks previous cpuset to the new cpuset,
where possible to the same node, relative to the new cpuset,
as the node that held the page, relative to the old cpuset.
Also if 'memory_migrate' is set true, then if that cpusets
'mems' file is modified, pages allocated to tasks in that
cpuset, that were on nodes in the previous setting of 'mems',
will be moved to nodes in the new setting of 'mems.' Again,
depending on the implementation, this might be done by swapping,
or by direct copying. In either case, pages that were not in
the tasks prior cpuset, or in the cpusets prior 'mems' setting,
will not be moved.
There is an exception to the above. If hotplug functionality is used
to remove all the CPUs that are currently assigned to a cpuset,
then the kernel will automatically update the cpus_allowed of all

3
Documentation/dvb/avermedia.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -150,7 +150,8 @@ Getting the card going
The frontend module sp887x.o, requires an external firmware.
Please use the command "get_dvb_firmware sp887x" to download
it. Then copy it to /usr/lib/hotplug/firmware.
it. Then copy it to /usr/lib/hotplug/firmware or /lib/firmware/
(depending on configuration of firmware hotplug).
Receiving DVB-T in Australia

23
Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware
Просмотреть файл

@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ use IO::Handle;
@components = ( "sp8870", "sp887x", "tda10045", "tda10046", "av7110", "dec2000t",
"dec2540t", "dec3000s", "vp7041", "dibusb", "nxt2002", "nxt2004",
"or51211", "or51132_qam", "or51132_vsb");
"or51211", "or51132_qam", "or51132_vsb", "bluebird");
# Check args
syntax() if (scalar(@ARGV) != 1);
@ -34,7 +34,11 @@ for ($i=0; $i < scalar(@components); $i++) {
if ($cid eq $components[$i]) {
$outfile = eval($cid);
die $@ if $@;
print STDERR "Firmware $outfile extracted successfully. Now copy it to either /lib/firmware or /usr/lib/hotplug/firmware/ (depending on your hotplug version).\n";
print STDERR <<EOF;
Firmware $outfile extracted successfully.
Now copy it to either /usr/lib/hotplug/firmware or /lib/firmware
(depending on configuration of firmware hotplug).
EOF
exit(0);
}
}
@ -243,7 +247,7 @@ sub nxt2002 {
my $tmpdir = tempdir(DIR => "/tmp", CLEANUP => 1);
checkstandard();
wgetfile($sourcefile, $url);
unzip($sourcefile, $tmpdir);
verify("$tmpdir/SkyNETU.sys", $hash);
@ -308,6 +312,19 @@ sub or51132_vsb {
$fwfile;
}
sub bluebird {
my $url = "http://www.linuxtv.org/download/dvb/firmware/dvb-usb-bluebird-01.fw";
my $outfile = "dvb-usb-bluebird-01.fw";
my $hash = "658397cb9eba9101af9031302671f49d";
checkstandard();
wgetfile($outfile, $url);
verify($outfile,$hash);
$outfile;
}
# ---------------------------------------------------------------
# Utilities

3
Documentation/dvb/ttusb-dec.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -41,4 +41,5 @@ Hotplug Firmware Loading for 2.6 kernels
For 2.6 kernels the firmware is loaded at the point that the driver module is
loaded. See linux/Documentation/dvb/firmware.txt for more information.
Copy the three files downloaded above into the /usr/lib/hotplug/firmware directory.
Copy the three files downloaded above into the /usr/lib/hotplug/firmware or
/lib/firmware directory (depending on configuration of firmware hotplug).

1
Documentation/fb/cyblafb/bugs
Просмотреть файл

@ -11,4 +11,3 @@ Untested features
All LCD stuff is untested. If it worked in tridentfb, it should work in
cyblafb. Please test and report the results to Knut_Petersen@t-online.de.

57
Documentation/fb/cyblafb/fb.modes
Просмотреть файл

@ -14,142 +14,141 @@
#
mode "640x480-50"
geometry 640 480 640 3756 8
geometry 640 480 2048 4096 8
timings 47619 4294967256 24 17 0 216 3
endmode
mode "640x480-60"
geometry 640 480 640 3756 8
geometry 640 480 2048 4096 8
timings 39682 4294967256 24 17 0 216 3
endmode
mode "640x480-70"
geometry 640 480 640 3756 8
geometry 640 480 2048 4096 8
timings 34013 4294967256 24 17 0 216 3
endmode
mode "640x480-72"
geometry 640 480 640 3756 8
geometry 640 480 2048 4096 8
timings 33068 4294967256 24 17 0 216 3
endmode
mode "640x480-75"
geometry 640 480 640 3756 8
geometry 640 480 2048 4096 8
timings 31746 4294967256 24 17 0 216 3
endmode
mode "640x480-80"
geometry 640 480 640 3756 8
geometry 640 480 2048 4096 8
timings 29761 4294967256 24 17 0 216 3
endmode
mode "640x480-85"
geometry 640 480 640 3756 8
geometry 640 480 2048 4096 8
timings 28011 4294967256 24 17 0 216 3
endmode
mode "800x600-50"
geometry 800 600 800 3221 8
geometry 800 600 2048 4096 8
timings 30303 96 24 14 0 136 11
endmode
mode "800x600-60"
geometry 800 600 800 3221 8
geometry 800 600 2048 4096 8
timings 25252 96 24 14 0 136 11
endmode
mode "800x600-70"
geometry 800 600 800 3221 8
geometry 800 600 2048 4096 8
timings 21645 96 24 14 0 136 11
endmode
mode "800x600-72"
geometry 800 600 800 3221 8
geometry 800 600 2048 4096 8
timings 21043 96 24 14 0 136 11
endmode
mode "800x600-75"
geometry 800 600 800 3221 8
geometry 800 600 2048 4096 8
timings 20202 96 24 14 0 136 11
endmode
mode "800x600-80"
geometry 800 600 800 3221 8
geometry 800 600 2048 4096 8
timings 18939 96 24 14 0 136 11
endmode
mode "800x600-85"
geometry 800 600 800 3221 8
geometry 800 600 2048 4096 8
timings 17825 96 24 14 0 136 11
endmode
mode "1024x768-50"
geometry 1024 768 1024 2815 8
geometry 1024 768 2048 4096 8
timings 19054 144 24 29 0 120 3
endmode
mode "1024x768-60"
geometry 1024 768 1024 2815 8
geometry 1024 768 2048 4096 8
timings 15880 144 24 29 0 120 3
endmode
mode "1024x768-70"
geometry 1024 768 1024 2815 8
geometry 1024 768 2048 4096 8
timings 13610 144 24 29 0 120 3
endmode
mode "1024x768-72"
geometry 1024 768 1024 2815 8
geometry 1024 768 2048 4096 8
timings 13232 144 24 29 0 120 3
endmode
mode "1024x768-75"
geometry 1024 768 1024 2815 8
geometry 1024 768 2048 4096 8
timings 12703 144 24 29 0 120 3
endmode
mode "1024x768-80"
geometry 1024 768 1024 2815 8
geometry 1024 768 2048 4096 8
timings 11910 144 24 29 0 120 3
endmode
mode "1024x768-85"
geometry 1024 768 1024 2815 8
geometry 1024 768 2048 4096 8
timings 11209 144 24 29 0 120 3
endmode
mode "1280x1024-50"
geometry 1280 1024 1280 2662 8
geometry 1280 1024 2048 4096 8
timings 11114 232 16 39 0 160 3
endmode
mode "1280x1024-60"
geometry 1280 1024 1280 2662 8
geometry 1280 1024 2048 4096 8
timings 9262 232 16 39 0 160 3
endmode
mode "1280x1024-70"
geometry 1280 1024 1280 2662 8
geometry 1280 1024 2048 4096 8
timings 7939 232 16 39 0 160 3
endmode
mode "1280x1024-72"
geometry 1280 1024 1280 2662 8
geometry 1280 1024 2048 4096 8
timings 7719 232 16 39 0 160 3
endmode
mode "1280x1024-75"
geometry 1280 1024 1280 2662 8
geometry 1280 1024 2048 4096 8
timings 7410 232 16 39 0 160 3
endmode
mode "1280x1024-80"
geometry 1280 1024 1280 2662 8
geometry 1280 1024 2048 4096 8
timings 6946 232 16 39 0 160 3
endmode
mode "1280x1024-85"
geometry 1280 1024 1280 2662 8
geometry 1280 1024 2048 4096 8
timings 6538 232 16 39 0 160 3
endmode

1
Documentation/fb/cyblafb/performance
Просмотреть файл

@ -77,4 +77,3 @@ patch that speeds up kernel bitblitting a lot ( > 20%).
| | | | |
| | | | |
+-----------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+

5
Documentation/fb/cyblafb/todo
Просмотреть файл

@ -22,11 +22,10 @@ accelerated color blitting Who needs it? The console driver does use color
everything else is done using color expanding
blitting of 1bpp character bitmaps.
xpanning Who needs it?
ioctls Who needs it?
TV-out Will be done later
TV-out Will be done later. Use "vga= " at boot time
to set a suitable video mode.
??? Feel free to contact me if you have any
feature requests

33
Documentation/fb/cyblafb/usage
Просмотреть файл

@ -40,6 +40,16 @@ Selecting Modes
None of the modes possible to select as startup modes are affected by
the problems described at the end of the next subsection.
For all startup modes cyblafb chooses a virtual x resolution of 2048,
the only exception is mode 1280x1024 in combination with 32 bpp. This
allows ywrap scrolling for all those modes if rotation is 0 or 2, and
also fast scrolling if rotation is 1 or 3. The default virtual y reso-
lution is 4096 for bpp == 8, 2048 for bpp==16 and 1024 for bpp == 32,
again with the only exception of 1280x1024 at 32 bpp.
Please do set your video memory size to 8 Mb in the Bios setup. Other
values will work, but performace is decreased for a lot of modes.
Mode changes using fbset
========================
@ -54,20 +64,26 @@ Selecting Modes
- if a flat panel is found, cyblafb does not allow you
to program a resolution higher than the physical
resolution of the flat panel monitor
- cyblafb does not allow xres to differ from xres_virtual
- cyblafb does not allow vclk to exceed 230 MHz. As 32 bpp
and (currently) 24 bit modes use a doubled vclk internally,
the dotclock limit as seen by fbset is 115 MHz for those
modes and 230 MHz for 8 and 16 bpp modes.
- cyblafb will allow you to select very high resolutions as
long as the hardware can be programmed to these modes. The
documented limit 1600x1200 is not enforced, but don't expect
perfect signal quality.
Any request that violates the rules given above will be ignored and
fbset will return an error.
Any request that violates the rules given above will be either changed
to something the hardware supports or an error value will be returned.
If you program a virtual y resolution higher than the hardware limit,
cyblafb will silently decrease that value to the highest possible
value.
value. The same is true for a virtual x resolution that is not
supported by the hardware. Cyblafb tries to adapt vyres first because
vxres decides if ywrap scrolling is possible or not.
Attempts to disable acceleration are ignored.
Attempts to disable acceleration are ignored, I believe that this is
safe.
Some video modes that should work do not work as expected. If you use
the standard fb.modes, fbset 640x480-60 will program that mode, but
@ -129,10 +145,6 @@ mode 640x480 or 800x600 or 1024x768 or 1280x1024
verbosity 0 is the default, increase to at least 2 for every
bug report!
vesafb allows cyblafb to be loaded after vesafb has been
loaded. See sections "Module unloading ...".
Development hints
=================
@ -195,7 +207,7 @@ a graphics mode.
After booting, load cyblafb without any mode and bpp parameter and assign
cyblafb to individual ttys using con2fb, e.g.:
modprobe cyblafb vesafb=1
modprobe cyblafb
con2fb /dev/fb1 /dev/tty1
Unloading cyblafb works without problems after you assign vesafb to all
@ -203,4 +215,3 @@ ttys again, e.g.:
con2fb /dev/fb0 /dev/tty1
rmmod cyblafb

29
Documentation/fb/cyblafb/whatsnew Normal file
Просмотреть файл

@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
0.62
====
- the vesafb parameter has been removed as I decided to allow the
feature without any special parameter.
- Cyblafb does not use the vga style of panning any longer, now the
"right view" register in the graphics engine IO space is used. Without
that change it was impossible to use all available memory, and without
access to all available memory it is impossible to ywrap.
- The imageblit function now uses hardware acceleration for all font
widths. Hardware blitting across pixel column 2048 is broken in the
cyberblade/i1 graphics core, but we work around that hardware bug.
- modes with vxres != xres are supported now.
- ywrap scrolling is supported now and the default. This is a big
performance gain.
- default video modes use vyres > yres and vxres > xres to allow
almost optimal scrolling speed for normal and rotated screens
- some features mainly usefull for debugging the upper layers of the
framebuffer system have been added, have a look at the code
- fixed: Oops after unloading cyblafb when reading /proc/io*
- we work around some bugs of the higher framebuffer layers.

29
Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -47,17 +47,6 @@ Who: Paul E. McKenney <paulmck@us.ibm.com>
---------------------------
What: IEEE1394 Audio and Music Data Transmission Protocol driver,
Connection Management Procedures driver
When: November 2005
Files: drivers/ieee1394/{amdtp,cmp}*
Why: These are incomplete, have never worked, and are better implemented
in userland via raw1394 (see http://freebob.sourceforge.net/ for
example.)
Who: Jody McIntyre <scjody@steamballoon.com>
---------------------------
What: raw1394: requests of type RAW1394_REQ_ISO_SEND, RAW1394_REQ_ISO_LISTEN
When: November 2005
Why: Deprecated in favour of the new ioctl-based rawiso interface, which is
@ -82,15 +71,6 @@ Who: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@brturbo.com.br>
---------------------------
What: i2c sysfs name change: in1_ref, vid deprecated in favour of cpu0_vid
When: November 2005
Files: drivers/i2c/chips/adm1025.c, drivers/i2c/chips/adm1026.c
Why: Match the other drivers' name for the same function, duplicate names
will be available until removal of old names.
Who: Grant Coady <gcoady@gmail.com>
---------------------------
What: remove EXPORT_SYMBOL(panic_timeout)
When: April 2006
Files: kernel/panic.c
@ -143,6 +123,15 @@ Who: Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de>
---------------------------
What: CONFIG_FORCED_INLINING
When: June 2006
Why: Config option is there to see if gcc is good enough. (in january
2006). If it is, the behavior should just be the default. If it's not,
the option should just go away entirely.
Who: Arjan van de Ven
---------------------------
What: START_ARRAY ioctl for md
When: July 2006
Files: drivers/md/md.c

8
Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX
Просмотреть файл

@ -12,14 +12,16 @@ cifs.txt
- description of the CIFS filesystem
coda.txt
- description of the CODA filesystem.
configfs/
- directory containing configfs documentation and example code.
cramfs.txt
- info on the cram filesystem for small storage (ROMs etc)
devfs/
- directory containing devfs documentation.
dlmfs.txt
- info on the userspace interface to the OCFS2 DLM.
ext2.txt
- info, mount options and specifications for the Ext2 filesystem.
fat_cvf.txt
- info on the Compressed Volume Files extension to the FAT filesystem
hpfs.txt
- info and mount options for the OS/2 HPFS.
isofs.txt
@ -32,6 +34,8 @@ ntfs.txt
- info and mount options for the NTFS filesystem (Windows NT).
proc.txt
- info on Linux's /proc filesystem.
ocfs2.txt
- info and mount options for the OCFS2 clustered filesystem.
romfs.txt
- Description of the ROMFS filesystem.
smbfs.txt

434
Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt Normal file
Просмотреть файл

@ -0,0 +1,434 @@
configfs - Userspace-driven kernel object configuation.
Joel Becker <joel.becker@oracle.com>
Updated: 31 March 2005
Copyright (c) 2005 Oracle Corporation,
Joel Becker <joel.becker@oracle.com>
[What is configfs?]
configfs is a ram-based filesystem that provides the converse of
sysfs's functionality. Where sysfs is a filesystem-based view of
kernel objects, configfs is a filesystem-based manager of kernel
objects, or config_items.
With sysfs, an object is created in kernel (for example, when a device
is discovered) and it is registered with sysfs. Its attributes then
appear in sysfs, allowing userspace to read the attributes via
readdir(3)/read(2). It may allow some attributes to be modified via
write(2). The important point is that the object is created and
destroyed in kernel, the kernel controls the lifecycle of the sysfs
representation, and sysfs is merely a window on all this.
A configfs config_item is created via an explicit userspace operation:
mkdir(2). It is destroyed via rmdir(2). The attributes appear at
mkdir(2) time, and can be read or modified via read(2) and write(2).
As with sysfs, readdir(3) queries the list of items and/or attributes.
symlink(2) can be used to group items together. Unlike sysfs, the
lifetime of the representation is completely driven by userspace. The
kernel modules backing the items must respond to this.
Both sysfs and configfs can and should exist together on the same
system. One is not a replacement for the other.
[Using configfs]
configfs can be compiled as a module or into the kernel. You can access
it by doing
mount -t configfs none /config
The configfs tree will be empty unless client modules are also loaded.
These are modules that register their item types with configfs as
subsystems. Once a client subsystem is loaded, it will appear as a
subdirectory (or more than one) under /config. Like sysfs, the
configfs tree is always there, whether mounted on /config or not.
An item is created via mkdir(2). The item's attributes will also
appear at this time. readdir(3) can determine what the attributes are,
read(2) can query their default values, and write(2) can store new
values. Like sysfs, attributes should be ASCII text files, preferably
with only one value per file. The same efficiency caveats from sysfs
apply. Don't mix more than one attribute in one attribute file.
Like sysfs, configfs expects write(2) to store the entire buffer at
once. When writing to configfs attributes, userspace processes should
first read the entire file, modify the portions they wish to change, and
then write the entire buffer back. Attribute files have a maximum size
of one page (PAGE_SIZE, 4096 on i386).
When an item needs to be destroyed, remove it with rmdir(2). An
item cannot be destroyed if any other item has a link to it (via
symlink(2)). Links can be removed via unlink(2).
[Configuring FakeNBD: an Example]
Imagine there's a Network Block Device (NBD) driver that allows you to
access remote block devices. Call it FakeNBD. FakeNBD uses configfs
for its configuration. Obviously, there will be a nice program that
sysadmins use to configure FakeNBD, but somehow that program has to tell
the driver about it. Here's where configfs comes in.
When the FakeNBD driver is loaded, it registers itself with configfs.
readdir(3) sees this just fine:
# ls /config
fakenbd
A fakenbd connection can be created with mkdir(2). The name is
arbitrary, but likely the tool will make some use of the name. Perhaps
it is a uuid or a disk name:
# mkdir /config/fakenbd/disk1
# ls /config/fakenbd/disk1
target device rw
The target attribute contains the IP address of the server FakeNBD will
connect to. The device attribute is the device on the server.
Predictably, the rw attribute determines whether the connection is
read-only or read-write.
# echo 10.0.0.1 > /config/fakenbd/disk1/target
# echo /dev/sda1 > /config/fakenbd/disk1/device
# echo 1 > /config/fakenbd/disk1/rw
That's it. That's all there is. Now the device is configured, via the
shell no less.
[Coding With configfs]
Every object in configfs is a config_item. A config_item reflects an
object in the subsystem. It has attributes that match values on that
object. configfs handles the filesystem representation of that object
and its attributes, allowing the subsystem to ignore all but the
basic show/store interaction.
Items are created and destroyed inside a config_group. A group is a
collection of items that share the same attributes and operations.
Items are created by mkdir(2) and removed by rmdir(2), but configfs
handles that. The group has a set of operations to perform these tasks
A subsystem is the top level of a client module. During initialization,
the client module registers the subsystem with configfs, the subsystem
appears as a directory at the top of the configfs filesystem. A
subsystem is also a config_group, and can do everything a config_group
can.
[struct config_item]
struct config_item {
char *ci_name;
char ci_namebuf[UOBJ_NAME_LEN];
struct kref ci_kref;
struct list_head ci_entry;
struct config_item *ci_parent;
struct config_group *ci_group;
struct config_item_type *ci_type;
struct dentry *ci_dentry;
};
void config_item_init(struct config_item *);
void config_item_init_type_name(struct config_item *,
const char *name,
struct config_item_type *type);
struct config_item *config_item_get(struct config_item *);
void config_item_put(struct config_item *);
Generally, struct config_item is embedded in a container structure, a
structure that actually represents what the subsystem is doing. The
config_item portion of that structure is how the object interacts with
configfs.
Whether statically defined in a source file or created by a parent
config_group, a config_item must have one of the _init() functions
called on it. This initializes the reference count and sets up the
appropriate fields.
All users of a config_item should have a reference on it via
config_item_get(), and drop the reference when they are done via
config_item_put().
By itself, a config_item cannot do much more than appear in configfs.
Usually a subsystem wants the item to display and/or store attributes,
among other things. For that, it needs a type.
[struct config_item_type]
struct configfs_item_operations {
void (*release)(struct config_item *);
ssize_t (*show_attribute)(struct config_item *,
struct configfs_attribute *,
char *);
ssize_t (*store_attribute)(struct config_item *,
struct configfs_attribute *,
const char *, size_t);
int (*allow_link)(struct config_item *src,
struct config_item *target);
int (*drop_link)(struct config_item *src,
struct config_item *target);
};
struct config_item_type {
struct module *ct_owner;
struct configfs_item_operations *ct_item_ops;
struct configfs_group_operations *ct_group_ops;
struct configfs_attribute **ct_attrs;
};
The most basic function of a config_item_type is to define what
operations can be performed on a config_item. All items that have been
allocated dynamically will need to provide the ct_item_ops->release()
method. This method is called when the config_item's reference count
reaches zero. Items that wish to display an attribute need to provide
the ct_item_ops->show_attribute() method. Similarly, storing a new
attribute value uses the store_attribute() method.
[struct configfs_attribute]
struct configfs_attribute {
char *ca_name;
struct module *ca_owner;
mode_t ca_mode;
};
When a config_item wants an attribute to appear as a file in the item's
configfs directory, it must define a configfs_attribute describing it.
It then adds the attribute to the NULL-terminated array
config_item_type->ct_attrs. When the item appears in configfs, the
attribute file will appear with the configfs_attribute->ca_name
filename. configfs_attribute->ca_mode specifies the file permissions.
If an attribute is readable and the config_item provides a
ct_item_ops->show_attribute() method, that method will be called
whenever userspace asks for a read(2) on the attribute. The converse
will happen for write(2).
[struct config_group]
A config_item cannot live in a vaccum. The only way one can be created
is via mkdir(2) on a config_group. This will trigger creation of a
child item.
struct config_group {
struct config_item cg_item;
struct list_head cg_children;
struct configfs_subsystem *cg_subsys;
struct config_group **default_groups;
};
void config_group_init(struct config_group *group);
void config_group_init_type_name(struct config_group *group,
const char *name,
struct config_item_type *type);
The config_group structure contains a config_item. Properly configuring
that item means that a group can behave as an item in its own right.
However, it can do more: it can create child items or groups. This is
accomplished via the group operations specified on the group's
config_item_type.
struct configfs_group_operations {
struct config_item *(*make_item)(struct config_group *group,
const char *name);
struct config_group *(*make_group)(struct config_group *group,
const char *name);
int (*commit_item)(struct config_item *item);
void (*drop_item)(struct config_group *group,
struct config_item *item);
};
A group creates child items by providing the
ct_group_ops->make_item() method. If provided, this method is called from mkdir(2) in the group's directory. The subsystem allocates a new
config_item (or more likely, its container structure), initializes it,
and returns it to configfs. Configfs will then populate the filesystem
tree to reflect the new item.
If the subsystem wants the child to be a group itself, the subsystem
provides ct_group_ops->make_group(). Everything else behaves the same,
using the group _init() functions on the group.
Finally, when userspace calls rmdir(2) on the item or group,
ct_group_ops->drop_item() is called. As a config_group is also a
config_item, it is not necessary for a seperate drop_group() method.
The subsystem must config_item_put() the reference that was initialized
upon item allocation. If a subsystem has no work to do, it may omit
the ct_group_ops->drop_item() method, and configfs will call
config_item_put() on the item on behalf of the subsystem.
IMPORTANT: drop_item() is void, and as such cannot fail. When rmdir(2)
is called, configfs WILL remove the item from the filesystem tree
(assuming that it has no children to keep it busy). The subsystem is
responsible for responding to this. If the subsystem has references to
the item in other threads, the memory is safe. It may take some time
for the item to actually disappear from the subsystem's usage. But it
is gone from configfs.
A config_group cannot be removed while it still has child items. This
is implemented in the configfs rmdir(2) code. ->drop_item() will not be
called, as the item has not been dropped. rmdir(2) will fail, as the
directory is not empty.
[struct configfs_subsystem]
A subsystem must register itself, ususally at module_init time. This
tells configfs to make the subsystem appear in the file tree.
struct configfs_subsystem {
struct config_group su_group;
struct semaphore su_sem;
};
int configfs_register_subsystem(struct configfs_subsystem *subsys);
void configfs_unregister_subsystem(struct configfs_subsystem *subsys);
A subsystem consists of a toplevel config_group and a semaphore.
The group is where child config_items are created. For a subsystem,
this group is usually defined statically. Before calling
configfs_register_subsystem(), the subsystem must have initialized the
group via the usual group _init() functions, and it must also have
initialized the semaphore.
When the register call returns, the subsystem is live, and it
will be visible via configfs. At that point, mkdir(2) can be called and
the subsystem must be ready for it.
[An Example]
The best example of these basic concepts is the simple_children
subsystem/group and the simple_child item in configfs_example.c It
shows a trivial object displaying and storing an attribute, and a simple
group creating and destroying these children.
[Hierarchy Navigation and the Subsystem Semaphore]
There is an extra bonus that configfs provides. The config_groups and
config_items are arranged in a hierarchy due to the fact that they
appear in a filesystem. A subsystem is NEVER to touch the filesystem
parts, but the subsystem might be interested in this hierarchy. For
this reason, the hierarchy is mirrored via the config_group->cg_children
and config_item->ci_parent structure members.
A subsystem can navigate the cg_children list and the ci_parent pointer
to see the tree created by the subsystem. This can race with configfs'
management of the hierarchy, so configfs uses the subsystem semaphore to
protect modifications. Whenever a subsystem wants to navigate the
hierarchy, it must do so under the protection of the subsystem
semaphore.
A subsystem will be prevented from acquiring the semaphore while a newly
allocated item has not been linked into this hierarchy. Similarly, it
will not be able to acquire the semaphore while a dropping item has not
yet been unlinked. This means that an item's ci_parent pointer will
never be NULL while the item is in configfs, and that an item will only
be in its parent's cg_children list for the same duration. This allows
a subsystem to trust ci_parent and cg_children while they hold the
semaphore.
[Item Aggregation Via symlink(2)]
configfs provides a simple group via the group->item parent/child
relationship. Often, however, a larger environment requires aggregation
outside of the parent/child connection. This is implemented via
symlink(2).
A config_item may provide the ct_item_ops->allow_link() and
ct_item_ops->drop_link() methods. If the ->allow_link() method exists,
symlink(2) may be called with the config_item as the source of the link.
These links are only allowed between configfs config_items. Any
symlink(2) attempt outside the configfs filesystem will be denied.
When symlink(2) is called, the source config_item's ->allow_link()
method is called with itself and a target item. If the source item
allows linking to target item, it returns 0. A source item may wish to
reject a link if it only wants links to a certain type of object (say,
in its own subsystem).
When unlink(2) is called on the symbolic link, the source item is
notified via the ->drop_link() method. Like the ->drop_item() method,
this is a void function and cannot return failure. The subsystem is
responsible for responding to the change.
A config_item cannot be removed while it links to any other item, nor
can it be removed while an item links to it. Dangling symlinks are not
allowed in configfs.
[Automatically Created Subgroups]
A new config_group may want to have two types of child config_items.
While this could be codified by magic names in ->make_item(), it is much
more explicit to have a method whereby userspace sees this divergence.
Rather than have a group where some items behave differently than
others, configfs provides a method whereby one or many subgroups are
automatically created inside the parent at its creation. Thus,
mkdir("parent) results in "parent", "parent/subgroup1", up through
"parent/subgroupN". Items of type 1 can now be created in
"parent/subgroup1", and items of type N can be created in
"parent/subgroupN".
These automatic subgroups, or default groups, do not preclude other
children of the parent group. If ct_group_ops->make_group() exists,
other child groups can be created on the parent group directly.
A configfs subsystem specifies default groups by filling in the
NULL-terminated array default_groups on the config_group structure.
Each group in that array is populated in the configfs tree at the same
time as the parent group. Similarly, they are removed at the same time
as the parent. No extra notification is provided. When a ->drop_item()
method call notifies the subsystem the parent group is going away, it
also means every default group child associated with that parent group.
As a consequence of this, default_groups cannot be removed directly via
rmdir(2). They also are not considered when rmdir(2) on the parent
group is checking for children.
[Committable Items]
NOTE: Committable items are currently unimplemented.
Some config_items cannot have a valid initial state. That is, no
default values can be specified for the item's attributes such that the
item can do its work. Userspace must configure one or more attributes,
after which the subsystem can start whatever entity this item
represents.
Consider the FakeNBD device from above. Without a target address *and*
a target device, the subsystem has no idea what block device to import.
The simple example assumes that the subsystem merely waits until all the
appropriate attributes are configured, and then connects. This will,
indeed, work, but now every attribute store must check if the attributes
are initialized. Every attribute store must fire off the connection if
that condition is met.
Far better would be an explicit action notifying the subsystem that the
config_item is ready to go. More importantly, an explicit action allows
the subsystem to provide feedback as to whether the attibutes are
initialized in a way that makes sense. configfs provides this as
committable items.
configfs still uses only normal filesystem operations. An item is
committed via rename(2). The item is moved from a directory where it
can be modified to a directory where it cannot.
Any group that provides the ct_group_ops->commit_item() method has
committable items. When this group appears in configfs, mkdir(2) will
not work directly in the group. Instead, the group will have two
subdirectories: "live" and "pending". The "live" directory does not
support mkdir(2) or rmdir(2) either. It only allows rename(2). The
"pending" directory does allow mkdir(2) and rmdir(2). An item is
created in the "pending" directory. Its attributes can be modified at
will. Userspace commits the item by renaming it into the "live"
directory. At this point, the subsystem recieves the ->commit_item()
callback. If all required attributes are filled to satisfaction, the
method returns zero and the item is moved to the "live" directory.
As rmdir(2) does not work in the "live" directory, an item must be
shutdown, or "uncommitted". Again, this is done via rename(2), this
time from the "live" directory back to the "pending" one. The subsystem
is notified by the ct_group_ops->uncommit_object() method.

474
Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example.c Normal file
Просмотреть файл

@ -0,0 +1,474 @@
/*
* vim: noexpandtab ts=8 sts=0 sw=8:
*
* configfs_example.c - This file is a demonstration module containing
* a number of configfs subsystems.
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
* modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
* License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
* version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
*
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
* General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
* License along with this program; if not, write to the
* Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
* Boston, MA 021110-1307, USA.
*
* Based on sysfs:
* sysfs is Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003 Patrick Mochel
*
* configfs Copyright (C) 2005 Oracle. All rights reserved.
*/
#include <linux/init.h>
#include <linux/module.h>
#include <linux/slab.h>
#include <linux/configfs.h>
/*
* 01-childless
*
* This first example is a childless subsystem. It cannot create
* any config_items. It just has attributes.
*
* Note that we are enclosing the configfs_subsystem inside a container.
* This is not necessary if a subsystem has no attributes directly
* on the subsystem. See the next example, 02-simple-children, for
* such a subsystem.
*/
struct childless {
struct configfs_subsystem subsys;
int showme;
int storeme;
};
struct childless_attribute {
struct configfs_attribute attr;
ssize_t (*show)(struct childless *, char *);
ssize_t (*store)(struct childless *, const char *, size_t);
};
static inline struct childless *to_childless(struct config_item *item)
{
return item ? container_of(to_configfs_subsystem(to_config_group(item)), struct childless, subsys) : NULL;
}
static ssize_t childless_showme_read(struct childless *childless,
char *page)
{
ssize_t pos;
pos = sprintf(page, "%d\n", childless->showme);
childless->showme++;
return pos;
}
static ssize_t childless_storeme_read(struct childless *childless,
char *page)
{
return sprintf(page, "%d\n", childless->storeme);
}
static ssize_t childless_storeme_write(struct childless *childless,
const char *page,
size_t count)
{
unsigned long tmp;
char *p = (char *) page;
tmp = simple_strtoul(p, &p, 10);
if (!p || (*p && (*p != '\n')))
return -EINVAL;
if (tmp > INT_MAX)
return -ERANGE;
childless->storeme = tmp;
return count;
}
static ssize_t childless_description_read(struct childless *childless,
char *page)
{
return sprintf(page,
"[01-childless]\n"
"\n"
"The childless subsystem is the simplest possible subsystem in\n"
"configfs. It does not support the creation of child config_items.\n"
"It only has a few attributes. In fact, it isn't much different\n"
"than a directory in /proc.\n");
}
static struct childless_attribute childless_attr_showme = {
.attr = { .ca_owner = THIS_MODULE, .ca_name = "showme", .ca_mode = S_IRUGO },
.show = childless_showme_read,
};
static struct childless_attribute childless_attr_storeme = {
.attr = { .ca_owner = THIS_MODULE, .ca_name = "storeme", .ca_mode = S_IRUGO | S_IWUSR },
.show = childless_storeme_read,
.store = childless_storeme_write,
};
static struct childless_attribute childless_attr_description = {
.attr = { .ca_owner = THIS_MODULE, .ca_name = "description", .ca_mode = S_IRUGO },
.show = childless_description_read,
};
static struct configfs_attribute *childless_attrs[] = {
&childless_attr_showme.attr,
&childless_attr_storeme.attr,
&childless_attr_description.attr,
NULL,
};
static ssize_t childless_attr_show(struct config_item *item,
struct configfs_attribute *attr,
char *page)
{
struct childless *childless = to_childless(item);
struct childless_attribute *childless_attr =
container_of(attr, struct childless_attribute, attr);
ssize_t ret = 0;
if (childless_attr->show)
ret = childless_attr->show(childless, page);
return ret;
}
static ssize_t childless_attr_store(struct config_item *item,
struct configfs_attribute *attr,
const char *page, size_t count)
{
struct childless *childless = to_childless(item);
struct childless_attribute *childless_attr =
container_of(attr, struct childless_attribute, attr);
ssize_t ret = -EINVAL;
if (childless_attr->store)
ret = childless_attr->store(childless, page, count);
return ret;
}
static struct configfs_item_operations childless_item_ops = {
.show_attribute = childless_attr_show,
.store_attribute = childless_attr_store,
};
static struct config_item_type childless_type = {
.ct_item_ops = &childless_item_ops,
.ct_attrs = childless_attrs,
.ct_owner = THIS_MODULE,
};
static struct childless childless_subsys = {
.subsys = {
.su_group = {
.cg_item = {
.ci_namebuf = "01-childless",
.ci_type = &childless_type,
},
},
},
};
/* ----------------------------------------------------------------- */
/*
* 02-simple-children
*
* This example merely has a simple one-attribute child. Note that
* there is no extra attribute structure, as the child's attribute is
* known from the get-go. Also, there is no container for the
* subsystem, as it has no attributes of its own.
*/
struct simple_child {
struct config_item item;
int storeme;
};
static inline struct simple_child *to_simple_child(struct config_item *item)
{
return item ? container_of(item, struct simple_child, item) : NULL;
}
static struct configfs_attribute simple_child_attr_storeme = {
.ca_owner = THIS_MODULE,
.ca_name = "storeme",
.ca_mode = S_IRUGO | S_IWUSR,
};
static struct configfs_attribute *simple_child_attrs[] = {
&simple_child_attr_storeme,
NULL,
};
static ssize_t simple_child_attr_show(struct config_item *item,
struct configfs_attribute *attr,
char *page)
{
ssize_t count;
struct simple_child *simple_child = to_simple_child(item);
count = sprintf(page, "%d\n", simple_child->storeme);
return count;
}
static ssize_t simple_child_attr_store(struct config_item *item,
struct configfs_attribute *attr,
const char *page, size_t count)
{
struct simple_child *simple_child = to_simple_child(item);
unsigned long tmp;
char *p = (char *) page;
tmp = simple_strtoul(p, &p, 10);
if (!p || (*p && (*p != '\n')))
return -EINVAL;
if (tmp > INT_MAX)
return -ERANGE;
simple_child->storeme = tmp;
return count;
}
static void simple_child_release(struct config_item *item)
{
kfree(to_simple_child(item));
}
static struct configfs_item_operations simple_child_item_ops = {
.release = simple_child_release,
.show_attribute = simple_child_attr_show,
.store_attribute = simple_child_attr_store,
};
static struct config_item_type simple_child_type = {
.ct_item_ops = &simple_child_item_ops,
.ct_attrs = simple_child_attrs,
.ct_owner = THIS_MODULE,
};
static struct config_item *simple_children_make_item(struct config_group *group, const char *name)
{
struct simple_child *simple_child;
simple_child = kmalloc(sizeof(struct simple_child), GFP_KERNEL);
if (!simple_child)
return NULL;
memset(simple_child, 0, sizeof(struct simple_child));
config_item_init_type_name(&simple_child->item, name,
&simple_child_type);
simple_child->storeme = 0;
return &simple_child->item;
}
static struct configfs_attribute simple_children_attr_description = {
.ca_owner = THIS_MODULE,
.ca_name = "description",
.ca_mode = S_IRUGO,
};
static struct configfs_attribute *simple_children_attrs[] = {
&simple_children_attr_description,
NULL,
};
static ssize_t simple_children_attr_show(struct config_item *item,
struct configfs_attribute *attr,
char *page)
{
return sprintf(page,
"[02-simple-children]\n"
"\n"
"This subsystem allows the creation of child config_items. These\n"
"items have only one attribute that is readable and writeable.\n");
}
static struct configfs_item_operations simple_children_item_ops = {
.show_attribute = simple_children_attr_show,
};
/*
* Note that, since no extra work is required on ->drop_item(),
* no ->drop_item() is provided.
*/
static struct configfs_group_operations simple_children_group_ops = {
.make_item = simple_children_make_item,
};
static struct config_item_type simple_children_type = {
.ct_item_ops = &simple_children_item_ops,
.ct_group_ops = &simple_children_group_ops,
.ct_attrs = simple_children_attrs,
};
static struct configfs_subsystem simple_children_subsys = {
.su_group = {
.cg_item = {
.ci_namebuf = "02-simple-children",
.ci_type = &simple_children_type,
},
},
};
/* ----------------------------------------------------------------- */
/*
* 03-group-children
*
* This example reuses the simple_children group from above. However,
* the simple_children group is not the subsystem itself, it is a
* child of the subsystem. Creation of a group in the subsystem creates
* a new simple_children group. That group can then have simple_child
* children of its own.
*/
struct simple_children {
struct config_group group;
};
static struct config_group *group_children_make_group(struct config_group *group, const char *name)
{
struct simple_children *simple_children;
simple_children = kmalloc(sizeof(struct simple_children),
GFP_KERNEL);
if (!simple_children)
return NULL;
memset(simple_children, 0, sizeof(struct simple_children));
config_group_init_type_name(&simple_children->group, name,
&simple_children_type);
return &simple_children->group;
}
static struct configfs_attribute group_children_attr_description = {
.ca_owner = THIS_MODULE,
.ca_name = "description",
.ca_mode = S_IRUGO,
};
static struct configfs_attribute *group_children_attrs[] = {
&group_children_attr_description,
NULL,
};
static ssize_t group_children_attr_show(struct config_item *item,
struct configfs_attribute *attr,
char *page)
{
return sprintf(page,
"[03-group-children]\n"
"\n"
"This subsystem allows the creation of child config_groups. These\n"
"groups are like the subsystem simple-children.\n");
}
static struct configfs_item_operations group_children_item_ops = {
.show_attribute = group_children_attr_show,
};
/*
* Note that, since no extra work is required on ->drop_item(),
* no ->drop_item() is provided.
*/
static struct configfs_group_operations group_children_group_ops = {
.make_group = group_children_make_group,
};
static struct config_item_type group_children_type = {
.ct_item_ops = &group_children_item_ops,
.ct_group_ops = &group_children_group_ops,
.ct_attrs = group_children_attrs,
};
static struct configfs_subsystem group_children_subsys = {
.su_group = {
.cg_item = {
.ci_namebuf = "03-group-children",
.ci_type = &group_children_type,
},
},
};
/* ----------------------------------------------------------------- */
/*
* We're now done with our subsystem definitions.
* For convenience in this module, here's a list of them all. It
* allows the init function to easily register them. Most modules
* will only have one subsystem, and will only call register_subsystem
* on it directly.
*/
static struct configfs_subsystem *example_subsys[] = {
&childless_subsys.subsys,
&simple_children_subsys,
&group_children_subsys,
NULL,
};
static int __init configfs_example_init(void)
{
int ret;
int i;
struct configfs_subsystem *subsys;
for (i = 0; example_subsys[i]; i++) {
subsys = example_subsys[i];
config_group_init(&subsys->su_group);
init_MUTEX(&subsys->su_sem);
ret = configfs_register_subsystem(subsys);
if (ret) {
printk(KERN_ERR "Error %d while registering subsystem %s\n",
ret,
subsys->su_group.cg_item.ci_namebuf);
goto out_unregister;
}
}
return 0;
out_unregister:
for (; i >= 0; i--) {
configfs_unregister_subsystem(example_subsys[i]);
}
return ret;
}
static void __exit configfs_example_exit(void)
{
int i;
for (i = 0; example_subsys[i]; i++) {
configfs_unregister_subsystem(example_subsys[i]);
}
}
module_init(configfs_example_init);
module_exit(configfs_example_exit);
MODULE_LICENSE("GPL");

130
Documentation/filesystems/dlmfs.txt Normal file
Просмотреть файл

@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
dlmfs
==================
A minimal DLM userspace interface implemented via a virtual file
system.
dlmfs is built with OCFS2 as it requires most of its infrastructure.
Project web page: http://oss.oracle.com/projects/ocfs2
Tools web page: http://oss.oracle.com/projects/ocfs2-tools
OCFS2 mailing lists: http://oss.oracle.com/projects/ocfs2/mailman/
All code copyright 2005 Oracle except when otherwise noted.
CREDITS
=======
Some code taken from ramfs which is Copyright (C) 2000 Linus Torvalds
and Transmeta Corp.
Mark Fasheh <mark.fasheh@oracle.com>
Caveats
=======
- Right now it only works with the OCFS2 DLM, though support for other
DLM implementations should not be a major issue.
Mount options
=============
None
Usage
=====
If you're just interested in OCFS2, then please see ocfs2.txt. The
rest of this document will be geared towards those who want to use
dlmfs for easy to setup and easy to use clustered locking in
userspace.
Setup
=====
dlmfs requires that the OCFS2 cluster infrastructure be in
place. Please download ocfs2-tools from the above url and configure a
cluster.
You'll want to start heartbeating on a volume which all the nodes in
your lockspace can access. The easiest way to do this is via
ocfs2_hb_ctl (distributed with ocfs2-tools). Right now it requires
that an OCFS2 file system be in place so that it can automatically
find it's heartbeat area, though it will eventually support heartbeat
against raw disks.
Please see the ocfs2_hb_ctl and mkfs.ocfs2 manual pages distributed
with ocfs2-tools.
Once you're heartbeating, DLM lock 'domains' can be easily created /
destroyed and locks within them accessed.
Locking
=======
Users may access dlmfs via standard file system calls, or they can use
'libo2dlm' (distributed with ocfs2-tools) which abstracts the file
system calls and presents a more traditional locking api.
dlmfs handles lock caching automatically for the user, so a lock
request for an already acquired lock will not generate another DLM
call. Userspace programs are assumed to handle their own local
locking.
Two levels of locks are supported - Shared Read, and Exlcusive.
Also supported is a Trylock operation.
For information on the libo2dlm interface, please see o2dlm.h,
distributed with ocfs2-tools.
Lock value blocks can be read and written to a resource via read(2)
and write(2) against the fd obtained via your open(2) call. The
maximum currently supported LVB length is 64 bytes (though that is an
OCFS2 DLM limitation). Through this mechanism, users of dlmfs can share
small amounts of data amongst their nodes.
mkdir(2) signals dlmfs to join a domain (which will have the same name
as the resulting directory)
rmdir(2) signals dlmfs to leave the domain
Locks for a given domain are represented by regular inodes inside the
domain directory. Locking against them is done via the open(2) system
call.
The open(2) call will not return until your lock has been granted or
an error has occurred, unless it has been instructed to do a trylock
operation. If the lock succeeds, you'll get an fd.
open(2) with O_CREAT to ensure the resource inode is created - dlmfs does
not automatically create inodes for existing lock resources.
Open Flag Lock Request Type
--------- -----------------
O_RDONLY Shared Read
O_RDWR Exclusive
Open Flag Resulting Locking Behavior
--------- --------------------------
O_NONBLOCK Trylock operation
You must provide exactly one of O_RDONLY or O_RDWR.
If O_NONBLOCK is also provided and the trylock operation was valid but
could not lock the resource then open(2) will return ETXTBUSY.
close(2) drops the lock associated with your fd.
Modes passed to mkdir(2) or open(2) are adhered to locally. Chown is
supported locally as well. This means you can use them to restrict
access to the resources via dlmfs on your local node only.
The resource LVB may be read from the fd in either Shared Read or
Exclusive modes via the read(2) system call. It can be written via
write(2) only when open in Exclusive mode.
Once written, an LVB will be visible to other nodes who obtain Read
Only or higher level locks on the resource.
See Also
========
http://opendlm.sourceforge.net/cvsmirror/opendlm/docs/dlmbook_final.pdf
For more information on the VMS distributed locking API.

181
Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -2,11 +2,11 @@
Ext3 Filesystem
===============
ext3 was originally released in September 1999. Written by Stephen Tweedie
for 2.2 branch, and ported to 2.4 kernels by Peter Braam, Andreas Dilger,
Ext3 was originally released in September 1999. Written by Stephen Tweedie
for the 2.2 branch, and ported to 2.4 kernels by Peter Braam, Andreas Dilger,
Andrew Morton, Alexander Viro, Ted Ts'o and Stephen Tweedie.
ext3 is ext2 filesystem enhanced with journalling capabilities.
Ext3 is the ext2 filesystem enhanced with journalling capabilities.
Options
=======
@ -14,76 +14,81 @@ Options
When mounting an ext3 filesystem, the following option are accepted:
(*) == default
jounal=update Update the ext3 file system's journal to the
current format.
journal=update Update the ext3 file system's journal to the current
format.
journal=inum When a journal already exists, this option is
ignored. Otherwise, it specifies the number of
the inode which will represent the ext3 file
system's journal file.
journal=inum When a journal already exists, this option is ignored.
Otherwise, it specifies the number of the inode which
will represent the ext3 file system's journal file.
journal_dev=devnum When the external journal device's major/minor numbers
have changed, this option allows the user to specify
the new journal location. The journal device is
identified through its new major/minor numbers encoded
in devnum.
noload Don't load the journal on mounting.
data=journal All data are committed into the journal prior
to being written into the main file system.
data=journal All data are committed into the journal prior to being
written into the main file system.
data=ordered (*) All data are forced directly out to the main file
system prior to its metadata being committed to
the journal.
system prior to its metadata being committed to the
journal.
data=writeback Data ordering is not preserved, data may be
written into the main file system after its
metadata has been committed to the journal.
data=writeback Data ordering is not preserved, data may be written
into the main file system after its metadata has been
committed to the journal.
commit=nrsec (*) Ext3 can be told to sync all its data and metadata
every 'nrsec' seconds. The default value is 5 seconds.
This means that if you lose your power, you will lose,
as much, the latest 5 seconds of work (your filesystem
will not be damaged though, thanks to journaling). This
default value (or any low value) will hurt performance,
but it's good for data-safety. Setting it to 0 will
have the same effect than leaving the default 5 sec.
This means that if you lose your power, you will lose
as much as the latest 5 seconds of work (your
filesystem will not be damaged though, thanks to the
journaling). This default value (or any low value)
will hurt performance, but it's good for data-safety.
Setting it to 0 will have the same effect as leaving
it at the default (5 seconds).
Setting it to very large values will improve
performance.
barrier=1 This enables/disables barriers. barrier=0 disables it,
barrier=1 enables it.
barrier=1 This enables/disables barriers. barrier=0 disables
it, barrier=1 enables it.
orlov (*) This enables the new Orlov block allocator. It's enabled
by default.
orlov (*) This enables the new Orlov block allocator. It is
enabled by default.
oldalloc This disables the Orlov block allocator and enables the
old block allocator. Orlov should have better performance,
we'd like to get some feedback if it's the contrary for
you.
oldalloc This disables the Orlov block allocator and enables
the old block allocator. Orlov should have better
performance - we'd like to get some feedback if it's
the contrary for you.
user_xattr Enables Extended User Attributes. Additionally, you need
to have extended attribute support enabled in the kernel
configuration (CONFIG_EXT3_FS_XATTR). See the attr(5)
manual page and http://acl.bestbits.at to learn more
about extended attributes.
user_xattr Enables Extended User Attributes. Additionally, you
need to have extended attribute support enabled in the
kernel configuration (CONFIG_EXT3_FS_XATTR). See the
attr(5) manual page and http://acl.bestbits.at/ to
learn more about extended attributes.
nouser_xattr Disables Extended User Attributes.
acl Enables POSIX Access Control Lists support. Additionally,
you need to have ACL support enabled in the kernel
configuration (CONFIG_EXT3_FS_POSIX_ACL). See the acl(5)
manual page and http://acl.bestbits.at for more
information.
acl Enables POSIX Access Control Lists support.
Additionally, you need to have ACL support enabled in
the kernel configuration (CONFIG_EXT3_FS_POSIX_ACL).
See the acl(5) manual page and http://acl.bestbits.at/
for more information.
noacl This option disables POSIX Access Control List support.
noacl This option disables POSIX Access Control List
support.
reservation
noreservation
resize=
bsddf (*) Make 'df' act like BSD.
minixdf Make 'df' act like Minix.
check=none Don't do extra checking of bitmaps on mount.
nocheck
nocheck
debug Extra debugging information is sent to syslog.
@ -92,7 +97,7 @@ errors=continue Keep going on a filesystem error.
errors=panic Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs.
grpid Give objects the same group ID as their creator.
bsdgroups
bsdgroups
nogrpid (*) New objects have the group ID of their creator.
sysvgroups
@ -103,81 +108,83 @@ resuid=n The user ID which may use the reserved blocks.
sb=n Use alternate superblock at this location.
quota Quota options are currently silently ignored.
noquota (see fs/ext3/super.c, line 594)
quota
noquota
grpquota
usrquota
Specification
=============
ext3 shares all disk implementation with ext2 filesystem, and add
transactions capabilities to ext2. Journaling is done by the
Journaling block device layer.
Ext3 shares all disk implementation with the ext2 filesystem, and adds
transactions capabilities to ext2. Journaling is done by the Journaling Block
Device layer.
Journaling Block Device layer
-----------------------------
The Journaling Block Device layer (JBD) isn't ext3 specific. It was
design to add journaling capabilities on a block device. The ext3
filesystem code will inform the JBD of modifications it is performing
(Call a transaction). the journal support the transactions start and
stop, and in case of crash, the journal can replayed the transactions
to put the partition on a consistent state fastly.
The Journaling Block Device layer (JBD) isn't ext3 specific. It was design to
add journaling capabilities on a block device. The ext3 filesystem code will
inform the JBD of modifications it is performing (called a transaction). The
journal supports the transactions start and stop, and in case of crash, the
journal can replayed the transactions to put the partition back in a
consistent state fast.
handles represent a single atomic update to a filesystem. JBD can
handle external journal on a block device.
Handles represent a single atomic update to a filesystem. JBD can handle an
external journal on a block device.
Data Mode
---------
There's 3 different data modes:
There are 3 different data modes:
* writeback mode
In data=writeback mode, ext3 does not journal data at all. This mode
provides a similar level of journaling as XFS, JFS, and ReiserFS in its
default mode - metadata journaling. A crash+recovery can cause
incorrect data to appear in files which were written shortly before the
crash. This mode will typically provide the best ext3 performance.
In data=writeback mode, ext3 does not journal data at all. This mode provides
a similar level of journaling as that of XFS, JFS, and ReiserFS in its default
mode - metadata journaling. A crash+recovery can cause incorrect data to
appear in files which were written shortly before the crash. This mode will
typically provide the best ext3 performance.
* ordered mode
In data=ordered mode, ext3 only officially journals metadata, but it
logically groups metadata and data blocks into a single unit called a
transaction. When it's time to write the new metadata out to disk, the
associated data blocks are written first. In general, this mode
perform slightly slower than writeback but significantly faster than
journal mode.
In data=ordered mode, ext3 only officially journals metadata, but it logically
groups metadata and data blocks into a single unit called a transaction. When
it's time to write the new metadata out to disk, the associated data blocks
are written first. In general, this mode performs slightly slower than
writeback but significantly faster than journal mode.
* journal mode
data=journal mode provides full data and metadata journaling. All new
data is written to the journal first, and then to its final location.
In the event of a crash, the journal can be replayed, bringing both
data and metadata into a consistent state. This mode is the slowest
except when data needs to be read from and written to disk at the same
time where it outperform all others mode.
data=journal mode provides full data and metadata journaling. All new data is
written to the journal first, and then to its final location.
In the event of a crash, the journal can be replayed, bringing both data and
metadata into a consistent state. This mode is the slowest except when data
needs to be read from and written to disk at the same time where it
outperforms all others modes.
Compatibility
-------------
Ext2 partitions can be easily convert to ext3, with `tune2fs -j <dev>`.
Ext3 is fully compatible with Ext2. Ext3 partitions can easily be
mounted as Ext2.
Ext3 is fully compatible with Ext2. Ext3 partitions can easily be mounted as
Ext2.
External Tools
==============
see manual pages to know more.
See manual pages to learn more.
tune2fs: create a ext3 journal on a ext2 partition with the -j flag.
mke2fs: create a ext3 partition with the -j flag.
debugfs: ext2 and ext3 file system debugger.
ext2online: online (mounted) ext2 and ext3 filesystem resizer
tune2fs: create a ext3 journal on a ext2 partition with the -j flags
mke2fs: create a ext3 partition with the -j flags
debugfs: ext2 and ext3 file system debugger
References
==========
kernel source: file:/usr/src/linux/fs/ext3
file:/usr/src/linux/fs/jbd
kernel source: <file:fs/ext3/>
<file:fs/jbd/>
programs: http://e2fsprogs.sourceforge.net
programs: http://e2fsprogs.sourceforge.net/
http://ext2resize.sourceforge.net
useful link:
http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/ext3/ext3-usage.html
useful links: http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/ext3/ext3-usage.html
http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/library/l-fs7/
http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/library/l-fs8/

63
Documentation/filesystems/fuse.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -86,6 +86,62 @@ Mount options
The default is infinite. Note that the size of read requests is
limited anyway to 32 pages (which is 128kbyte on i386).
Sysfs
~~~~~
FUSE sets up the following hierarchy in sysfs:
/sys/fs/fuse/connections/N/
where N is an increasing number allocated to each new connection.
For each connection the following attributes are defined:
'waiting'
The number of requests which are waiting to be transfered to
userspace or being processed by the filesystem daemon. If there is
no filesystem activity and 'waiting' is non-zero, then the
filesystem is hung or deadlocked.
'abort'
Writing anything into this file will abort the filesystem
connection. This means that all waiting requests will be aborted an
error returned for all aborted and new requests.
Only a privileged user may read or write these attributes.
Aborting a filesystem connection
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
It is possible to get into certain situations where the filesystem is
not responding. Reasons for this may be:
a) Broken userspace filesystem implementation
b) Network connection down
c) Accidental deadlock
d) Malicious deadlock
(For more on c) and d) see later sections)
In either of these cases it may be useful to abort the connection to
the filesystem. There are several ways to do this:
- Kill the filesystem daemon. Works in case of a) and b)
- Kill the filesystem daemon and all users of the filesystem. Works
in all cases except some malicious deadlocks
- Use forced umount (umount -f). Works in all cases but only if
filesystem is still attached (it hasn't been lazy unmounted)
- Abort filesystem through the sysfs interface. Most powerful
method, always works.
How do non-privileged mounts work?
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@ -313,3 +369,10 @@ faulted with get_user_pages(). The 'req->locked' flag indicates
when the copy is taking place, and interruption is delayed until
this flag is unset.
Scenario 3 - Tricky deadlock with asynchronous read
---------------------------------------------------
The same situation as above, except thread-1 will wait on page lock
and hence it will be uninterruptible as well. The solution is to
abort the connection with forced umount (if mount is attached) or
through the abort attribute in sysfs.

55
Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt Normal file
Просмотреть файл

@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
OCFS2 filesystem
==================
OCFS2 is a general purpose extent based shared disk cluster file
system with many similarities to ext3. It supports 64 bit inode
numbers, and has automatically extending metadata groups which may
also make it attractive for non-clustered use.
You'll want to install the ocfs2-tools package in order to at least
get "mount.ocfs2" and "ocfs2_hb_ctl".
Project web page: http://oss.oracle.com/projects/ocfs2
Tools web page: http://oss.oracle.com/projects/ocfs2-tools
OCFS2 mailing lists: http://oss.oracle.com/projects/ocfs2/mailman/
All code copyright 2005 Oracle except when otherwise noted.
CREDITS:
Lots of code taken from ext3 and other projects.
Authors in alphabetical order:
Joel Becker <joel.becker@oracle.com>
Zach Brown <zach.brown@oracle.com>
Mark Fasheh <mark.fasheh@oracle.com>
Kurt Hackel <kurt.hackel@oracle.com>
Sunil Mushran <sunil.mushran@oracle.com>
Manish Singh <manish.singh@oracle.com>
Caveats
=======
Features which OCFS2 does not support yet:
- sparse files
- extended attributes
- shared writeable mmap
- loopback is supported, but data written will not
be cluster coherent.
- quotas
- cluster aware flock
- Directory change notification (F_NOTIFY)
- Distributed Caching (F_SETLEASE/F_GETLEASE/break_lease)
- POSIX ACLs
- readpages / writepages (not user visible)
Mount options
=============
OCFS2 supports the following mount options:
(*) == default
barrier=1 This enables/disables barriers. barrier=0 disables it,
barrier=1 enables it.
errors=remount-ro(*) Remount the filesystem read-only on an error.
errors=panic Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs.
intr (*) Allow signals to interrupt cluster operations.
nointr Do not allow signals to interrupt cluster
operations.

19
Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ VmallocChunk: 111088 kB
Dirty: Memory which is waiting to get written back to the disk
Writeback: Memory which is actively being written back to the disk
Mapped: files which have been mmaped, such as libraries
Slab: in-kernel data structures cache
Slab: in-kernel data structures cache
CommitLimit: Based on the overcommit ratio ('vm.overcommit_ratio'),
this is the total amount of memory currently available to
be allocated on the system. This limit is only adhered to
@ -1302,6 +1302,23 @@ VM has token based thrashing control mechanism and uses the token to prevent
unnecessary page faults in thrashing situation. The unit of the value is
second. The value would be useful to tune thrashing behavior.
drop_caches
-----------
Writing to this will cause the kernel to drop clean caches, dentries and
inodes from memory, causing that memory to become free.
To free pagecache:
echo 1 > /proc/sys/vm/drop_caches
To free dentries and inodes:
echo 2 > /proc/sys/vm/drop_caches
To free pagecache, dentries and inodes:
echo 3 > /proc/sys/vm/drop_caches
As this is a non-destructive operation and dirty objects are not freeable, the
user should run `sync' first.
2.5 /proc/sys/dev - Device specific parameters
----------------------------------------------

72
Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -143,12 +143,26 @@ as the following example:
dir /mnt 755 0 0
file /init initramfs/init.sh 755 0 0
Run "usr/gen_init_cpio" (after the kernel build) to get a usage message
documenting the above file format.
One advantage of the text file is that root access is not required to
set permissions or create device nodes in the new archive. (Note that those
two example "file" entries expect to find files named "init.sh" and "busybox" in
a directory called "initramfs", under the linux-2.6.* directory. See
Documentation/early-userspace/README for more details.)
The kernel does not depend on external cpio tools, gen_init_cpio is created
from usr/gen_init_cpio.c which is entirely self-contained, and the kernel's
boot-time extractor is also (obviously) self-contained. However, if you _do_
happen to have cpio installed, the following command line can extract the
generated cpio image back into its component files:
cpio -i -d -H newc -F initramfs_data.cpio --no-absolute-filenames
Contents of initramfs:
----------------------
If you don't already understand what shared libraries, devices, and paths
you need to get a minimal root filesystem up and running, here are some
references:
@ -161,13 +175,69 @@ designed to be a tiny C library to statically link early userspace
code against, along with some related utilities. It is BSD licensed.
I use uClibc (http://www.uclibc.org) and busybox (http://www.busybox.net)
myself. These are LGPL and GPL, respectively.
myself. These are LGPL and GPL, respectively. (A self-contained initramfs
package is planned for the busybox 1.2 release.)
In theory you could use glibc, but that's not well suited for small embedded
uses like this. (A "hello world" program statically linked against glibc is
over 400k. With uClibc it's 7k. Also note that glibc dlopens libnss to do
name lookups, even when otherwise statically linked.)
Why cpio rather than tar?
-------------------------
This decision was made back in December, 2001. The discussion started here:
http://www.uwsg.iu.edu/hypermail/linux/kernel/0112.2/1538.html
And spawned a second thread (specifically on tar vs cpio), starting here:
http://www.uwsg.iu.edu/hypermail/linux/kernel/0112.2/1587.html
The quick and dirty summary version (which is no substitute for reading
the above threads) is:
1) cpio is a standard. It's decades old (from the AT&T days), and already
widely used on Linux (inside RPM, Red Hat's device driver disks). Here's
a Linux Journal article about it from 1996:
http://www.linuxjournal.com/article/1213
It's not as popular as tar because the traditional cpio command line tools
require _truly_hideous_ command line arguments. But that says nothing
either way about the archive format, and there are alternative tools,
such as:
http://freshmeat.net/projects/afio/
2) The cpio archive format chosen by the kernel is simpler and cleaner (and
thus easier to create and parse) than any of the (literally dozens of)
various tar archive formats. The complete initramfs archive format is
explained in buffer-format.txt, created in usr/gen_init_cpio.c, and
extracted in init/initramfs.c. All three together come to less than 26k
total of human-readable text.
3) The GNU project standardizing on tar is approximately as relevant as
Windows standardizing on zip. Linux is not part of either, and is free
to make its own technical decisions.
4) Since this is a kernel internal format, it could easily have been
something brand new. The kernel provides its own tools to create and
extract this format anyway. Using an existing standard was preferable,
but not essential.
5) Al Viro made the decision (quote: "tar is ugly as hell and not going to be
supported on the kernel side"):
http://www.uwsg.iu.edu/hypermail/linux/kernel/0112.2/1540.html
explained his reasoning:
http://www.uwsg.iu.edu/hypermail/linux/kernel/0112.2/1550.html
http://www.uwsg.iu.edu/hypermail/linux/kernel/0112.2/1638.html
and, most importantly, designed and implemented the initramfs code.
Future directions:
------------------

120
Documentation/filesystems/relayfs.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -44,30 +44,41 @@ relayfs can operate in a mode where it will overwrite data not yet
collected by userspace, and not wait for it to consume it.
relayfs itself does not provide for communication of such data between
userspace and kernel, allowing the kernel side to remain simple and not
impose a single interface on userspace. It does provide a separate
helper though, described below.
userspace and kernel, allowing the kernel side to remain simple and
not impose a single interface on userspace. It does provide a set of
examples and a separate helper though, described below.
klog, relay-app & librelay
==========================
klog and relay-apps example code
================================
relayfs itself is ready to use, but to make things easier, two
additional systems are provided. klog is a simple wrapper to make
writing formatted text or raw data to a channel simpler, regardless of
whether a channel to write into exists or not, or whether relayfs is
compiled into the kernel or is configured as a module. relay-app is
the kernel counterpart of userspace librelay.c, combined these two
files provide glue to easily stream data to disk, without having to
bother with housekeeping. klog and relay-app can be used together,
with klog providing high-level logging functions to the kernel and
relay-app taking care of kernel-user control and disk-logging chores.
relayfs itself is ready to use, but to make things easier, a couple
simple utility functions and a set of examples are provided.
It is possible to use relayfs without relay-app & librelay, but you'll
have to implement communication between userspace and kernel, allowing
both to convey the state of buffers (full, empty, amount of padding).
The relay-apps example tarball, available on the relayfs sourceforge
site, contains a set of self-contained examples, each consisting of a
pair of .c files containing boilerplate code for each of the user and
kernel sides of a relayfs application; combined these two sets of
boilerplate code provide glue to easily stream data to disk, without
having to bother with mundane housekeeping chores.
The 'klog debugging functions' patch (klog.patch in the relay-apps
tarball) provides a couple of high-level logging functions to the
kernel which allow writing formatted text or raw data to a channel,
regardless of whether a channel to write into exists or not, or
whether relayfs is compiled into the kernel or is configured as a
module. These functions allow you to put unconditional 'trace'
statements anywhere in the kernel or kernel modules; only when there
is a 'klog handler' registered will data actually be logged (see the
klog and kleak examples for details).
It is of course possible to use relayfs from scratch i.e. without
using any of the relay-apps example code or klog, but you'll have to
implement communication between userspace and kernel, allowing both to
convey the state of buffers (full, empty, amount of padding).
klog and the relay-apps examples can be found in the relay-apps
tarball on http://relayfs.sourceforge.net
klog, relay-app and librelay can be found in the relay-apps tarball on
http://relayfs.sourceforge.net
The relayfs user space API
==========================
@ -125,6 +136,8 @@ Here's a summary of the API relayfs provides to in-kernel clients:
relay_reset(chan)
relayfs_create_dir(name, parent)
relayfs_remove_dir(dentry)
relayfs_create_file(name, parent, mode, fops, data)
relayfs_remove_file(dentry)
channel management typically called on instigation of userspace:
@ -141,6 +154,8 @@ Here's a summary of the API relayfs provides to in-kernel clients:
subbuf_start(buf, subbuf, prev_subbuf, prev_padding)
buf_mapped(buf, filp)
buf_unmapped(buf, filp)
create_buf_file(filename, parent, mode, buf, is_global)
remove_buf_file(dentry)
helper functions:
@ -320,6 +335,71 @@ forces a sub-buffer switch on all the channel buffers, and can be used
to finalize and process the last sub-buffers before the channel is
closed.
Creating non-relay files
------------------------
relay_open() automatically creates files in the relayfs filesystem to
represent the per-cpu kernel buffers; it's often useful for
applications to be able to create their own files alongside the relay
files in the relayfs filesystem as well e.g. 'control' files much like
those created in /proc or debugfs for similar purposes, used to
communicate control information between the kernel and user sides of a
relayfs application. For this purpose the relayfs_create_file() and
relayfs_remove_file() API functions exist. For relayfs_create_file(),
the caller passes in a set of user-defined file operations to be used
for the file and an optional void * to a user-specified data item,
which will be accessible via inode->u.generic_ip (see the relay-apps
tarball for examples). The file_operations are a required parameter
to relayfs_create_file() and thus the semantics of these files are
completely defined by the caller.
See the relay-apps tarball at http://relayfs.sourceforge.net for
examples of how these non-relay files are meant to be used.
Creating relay files in other filesystems
-----------------------------------------
By default of course, relay_open() creates relay files in the relayfs
filesystem. Because relay_file_operations is exported, however, it's
also possible to create and use relay files in other pseudo-filesytems
such as debugfs.
For this purpose, two callback functions are provided,
create_buf_file() and remove_buf_file(). create_buf_file() is called
once for each per-cpu buffer from relay_open() to allow the client to
create a file to be used to represent the corresponding buffer; if
this callback is not defined, the default implementation will create
and return a file in the relayfs filesystem to represent the buffer.
The callback should return the dentry of the file created to represent
the relay buffer. Note that the parent directory passed to
relay_open() (and passed along to the callback), if specified, must
exist in the same filesystem the new relay file is created in. If
create_buf_file() is defined, remove_buf_file() must also be defined;
it's responsible for deleting the file(s) created in create_buf_file()
and is called during relay_close().
The create_buf_file() implementation can also be defined in such a way
as to allow the creation of a single 'global' buffer instead of the
default per-cpu set. This can be useful for applications interested
mainly in seeing the relative ordering of system-wide events without
the need to bother with saving explicit timestamps for the purpose of
merging/sorting per-cpu files in a postprocessing step.
To have relay_open() create a global buffer, the create_buf_file()
implementation should set the value of the is_global outparam to a
non-zero value in addition to creating the file that will be used to
represent the single buffer. In the case of a global buffer,
create_buf_file() and remove_buf_file() will be called only once. The
normal channel-writing functions e.g. relay_write() can still be used
- writes from any cpu will transparently end up in the global buffer -
but since it is a global buffer, callers should make sure they use the
proper locking for such a buffer, either by wrapping writes in a
spinlock, or by copying a write function from relayfs_fs.h and
creating a local version that internally does the proper locking.
See the 'exported-relayfile' examples in the relay-apps tarball for
examples of creating and using relay files in debugfs.
Misc
----

521
Documentation/filesystems/spufs.txt Normal file
Просмотреть файл

@ -0,0 +1,521 @@
SPUFS(2) Linux Programmer's Manual SPUFS(2)
NAME
spufs - the SPU file system
DESCRIPTION
The SPU file system is used on PowerPC machines that implement the Cell
Broadband Engine Architecture in order to access Synergistic Processor
Units (SPUs).
The file system provides a name space similar to posix shared memory or
message queues. Users that have write permissions on the file system
can use spu_create(2) to establish SPU contexts in the spufs root.
Every SPU context is represented by a directory containing a predefined
set of files. These files can be used for manipulating the state of the
logical SPU. Users can change permissions on those files, but not actu-
ally add or remove files.
MOUNT OPTIONS
uid=<uid>
set the user owning the mount point, the default is 0 (root).
gid=<gid>
set the group owning the mount point, the default is 0 (root).
FILES
The files in spufs mostly follow the standard behavior for regular sys-
tem calls like read(2) or write(2), but often support only a subset of
the operations supported on regular file systems. This list details the
supported operations and the deviations from the behaviour in the
respective man pages.
All files that support the read(2) operation also support readv(2) and
all files that support the write(2) operation also support writev(2).
All files support the access(2) and stat(2) family of operations, but
only the st_mode, st_nlink, st_uid and st_gid fields of struct stat
contain reliable information.
All files support the chmod(2)/fchmod(2) and chown(2)/fchown(2) opera-
tions, but will not be able to grant permissions that contradict the
possible operations, e.g. read access on the wbox file.
The current set of files is:
/mem
the contents of the local storage memory of the SPU. This can be
accessed like a regular shared memory file and contains both code and
data in the address space of the SPU. The possible operations on an
open mem file are:
read(2), pread(2), write(2), pwrite(2), lseek(2)
These operate as documented, with the exception that seek(2),
write(2) and pwrite(2) are not supported beyond the end of the
file. The file size is the size of the local storage of the SPU,
which normally is 256 kilobytes.
mmap(2)
Mapping mem into the process address space gives access to the
SPU local storage within the process address space. Only
MAP_SHARED mappings are allowed.
/mbox
The first SPU to CPU communication mailbox. This file is read-only and
can be read in units of 32 bits. The file can only be used in non-
blocking mode and it even poll() will not block on it. The possible
operations on an open mbox file are:
read(2)
If a count smaller than four is requested, read returns -1 and
sets errno to EINVAL. If there is no data available in the mail
box, the return value is set to -1 and errno becomes EAGAIN.
When data has been read successfully, four bytes are placed in
the data buffer and the value four is returned.
/ibox
The second SPU to CPU communication mailbox. This file is similar to
the first mailbox file, but can be read in blocking I/O mode, and the
poll familiy of system calls can be used to wait for it. The possible
operations on an open ibox file are:
read(2)
If a count smaller than four is requested, read returns -1 and
sets errno to EINVAL. If there is no data available in the mail
box and the file descriptor has been opened with O_NONBLOCK, the
return value is set to -1 and errno becomes EAGAIN.
If there is no data available in the mail box and the file
descriptor has been opened without O_NONBLOCK, the call will
block until the SPU writes to its interrupt mailbox channel.
When data has been read successfully, four bytes are placed in
the data buffer and the value four is returned.
poll(2)
Poll on the ibox file returns (POLLIN | POLLRDNORM) whenever
data is available for reading.
/wbox
The CPU to SPU communation mailbox. It is write-only can can be written
in units of 32 bits. If the mailbox is full, write() will block and
poll can be used to wait for it becoming empty again. The possible
operations on an open wbox file are: write(2) If a count smaller than
four is requested, write returns -1 and sets errno to EINVAL. If there
is no space available in the mail box and the file descriptor has been
opened with O_NONBLOCK, the return value is set to -1 and errno becomes
EAGAIN.
If there is no space available in the mail box and the file descriptor
has been opened without O_NONBLOCK, the call will block until the SPU
reads from its PPE mailbox channel. When data has been read success-
fully, four bytes are placed in the data buffer and the value four is
returned.
poll(2)
Poll on the ibox file returns (POLLOUT | POLLWRNORM) whenever
space is available for writing.
/mbox_stat
/ibox_stat
/wbox_stat
Read-only files that contain the length of the current queue, i.e. how
many words can be read from mbox or ibox or how many words can be
written to wbox without blocking. The files can be read only in 4-byte
units and return a big-endian binary integer number. The possible
operations on an open *box_stat file are:
read(2)
If a count smaller than four is requested, read returns -1 and
sets errno to EINVAL. Otherwise, a four byte value is placed in
the data buffer, containing the number of elements that can be
read from (for mbox_stat and ibox_stat) or written to (for
wbox_stat) the respective mail box without blocking or resulting
in EAGAIN.
/npc
/decr
/decr_status
/spu_tag_mask
/event_mask
/srr0
Internal registers of the SPU. The representation is an ASCII string
with the numeric value of the next instruction to be executed. These
can be used in read/write mode for debugging, but normal operation of
programs should not rely on them because access to any of them except
npc requires an SPU context save and is therefore very inefficient.
The contents of these files are:
npc Next Program Counter
decr SPU Decrementer
decr_status Decrementer Status
spu_tag_mask MFC tag mask for SPU DMA
event_mask Event mask for SPU interrupts
srr0 Interrupt Return address register
The possible operations on an open npc, decr, decr_status,
spu_tag_mask, event_mask or srr0 file are:
read(2)
When the count supplied to the read call is shorter than the
required length for the pointer value plus a newline character,
subsequent reads from the same file descriptor will result in
completing the string, regardless of changes to the register by
a running SPU task. When a complete string has been read, all
subsequent read operations will return zero bytes and a new file
descriptor needs to be opened to read the value again.
write(2)
A write operation on the file results in setting the register to
the value given in the string. The string is parsed from the
beginning to the first non-numeric character or the end of the
buffer. Subsequent writes to the same file descriptor overwrite
the previous setting.
/fpcr
This file gives access to the Floating Point Status and Control Regis-
ter as a four byte long file. The operations on the fpcr file are:
read(2)
If a count smaller than four is requested, read returns -1 and
sets errno to EINVAL. Otherwise, a four byte value is placed in
the data buffer, containing the current value of the fpcr regis-
ter.
write(2)
If a count smaller than four is requested, write returns -1 and
sets errno to EINVAL. Otherwise, a four byte value is copied
from the data buffer, updating the value of the fpcr register.
/signal1
/signal2
The two signal notification channels of an SPU. These are read-write
files that operate on a 32 bit word. Writing to one of these files
triggers an interrupt on the SPU. The value writting to the signal
files can be read from the SPU through a channel read or from host user
space through the file. After the value has been read by the SPU, it
is reset to zero. The possible operations on an open signal1 or sig-
nal2 file are:
read(2)
If a count smaller than four is requested, read returns -1 and
sets errno to EINVAL. Otherwise, a four byte value is placed in
the data buffer, containing the current value of the specified
signal notification register.
write(2)
If a count smaller than four is requested, write returns -1 and
sets errno to EINVAL. Otherwise, a four byte value is copied
from the data buffer, updating the value of the specified signal
notification register. The signal notification register will
either be replaced with the input data or will be updated to the
bitwise OR or the old value and the input data, depending on the
contents of the signal1_type, or signal2_type respectively,
file.
/signal1_type
/signal2_type
These two files change the behavior of the signal1 and signal2 notifi-
cation files. The contain a numerical ASCII string which is read as
either "1" or "0". In mode 0 (overwrite), the hardware replaces the
contents of the signal channel with the data that is written to it. in
mode 1 (logical OR), the hardware accumulates the bits that are subse-
quently written to it. The possible operations on an open signal1_type
or signal2_type file are:
read(2)
When the count supplied to the read call is shorter than the
required length for the digit plus a newline character, subse-
quent reads from the same file descriptor will result in com-
pleting the string. When a complete string has been read, all
subsequent read operations will return zero bytes and a new file
descriptor needs to be opened to read the value again.
write(2)
A write operation on the file results in setting the register to
the value given in the string. The string is parsed from the
beginning to the first non-numeric character or the end of the
buffer. Subsequent writes to the same file descriptor overwrite
the previous setting.
EXAMPLES
/etc/fstab entry
none /spu spufs gid=spu 0 0
AUTHORS
Arnd Bergmann <arndb@de.ibm.com>, Mark Nutter <mnutter@us.ibm.com>,
Ulrich Weigand <Ulrich.Weigand@de.ibm.com>
SEE ALSO
capabilities(7), close(2), spu_create(2), spu_run(2), spufs(7)
Linux 2005-09-28 SPUFS(2)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SPU_RUN(2) Linux Programmer's Manual SPU_RUN(2)
NAME
spu_run - execute an spu context
SYNOPSIS
#include <sys/spu.h>
int spu_run(int fd, unsigned int *npc, unsigned int *event);
DESCRIPTION
The spu_run system call is used on PowerPC machines that implement the
Cell Broadband Engine Architecture in order to access Synergistic Pro-
cessor Units (SPUs). It uses the fd that was returned from spu_cre-
ate(2) to address a specific SPU context. When the context gets sched-
uled to a physical SPU, it starts execution at the instruction pointer
passed in npc.
Execution of SPU code happens synchronously, meaning that spu_run does
not return while the SPU is still running. If there is a need to exe-
cute SPU code in parallel with other code on either the main CPU or
other SPUs, you need to create a new thread of execution first, e.g.
using the pthread_create(3) call.
When spu_run returns, the current value of the SPU instruction pointer
is written back to npc, so you can call spu_run again without updating
the pointers.
event can be a NULL pointer or point to an extended status code that
gets filled when spu_run returns. It can be one of the following con-
stants:
SPE_EVENT_DMA_ALIGNMENT
A DMA alignment error
SPE_EVENT_SPE_DATA_SEGMENT
A DMA segmentation error
SPE_EVENT_SPE_DATA_STORAGE
A DMA storage error
If NULL is passed as the event argument, these errors will result in a
signal delivered to the calling process.
RETURN VALUE
spu_run returns the value of the spu_status register or -1 to indicate
an error and set errno to one of the error codes listed below. The
spu_status register value contains a bit mask of status codes and
optionally a 14 bit code returned from the stop-and-signal instruction
on the SPU. The bit masks for the status codes are:
0x02 SPU was stopped by stop-and-signal.
0x04 SPU was stopped by halt.
0x08 SPU is waiting for a channel.
0x10 SPU is in single-step mode.
0x20 SPU has tried to execute an invalid instruction.
0x40 SPU has tried to access an invalid channel.
0x3fff0000
The bits masked with this value contain the code returned from
stop-and-signal.
There are always one or more of the lower eight bits set or an error
code is returned from spu_run.
ERRORS
EAGAIN or EWOULDBLOCK
fd is in non-blocking mode and spu_run would block.
EBADF fd is not a valid file descriptor.
EFAULT npc is not a valid pointer or status is neither NULL nor a valid
pointer.
EINTR A signal occured while spu_run was in progress. The npc value
has been updated to the new program counter value if necessary.
EINVAL fd is not a file descriptor returned from spu_create(2).
ENOMEM Insufficient memory was available to handle a page fault result-
ing from an MFC direct memory access.
ENOSYS the functionality is not provided by the current system, because
either the hardware does not provide SPUs or the spufs module is
not loaded.
NOTES
spu_run is meant to be used from libraries that implement a more
abstract interface to SPUs, not to be used from regular applications.
See http://www.bsc.es/projects/deepcomputing/linuxoncell/ for the rec-
ommended libraries.
CONFORMING TO
This call is Linux specific and only implemented by the ppc64 architec-
ture. Programs using this system call are not portable.
BUGS
The code does not yet fully implement all features lined out here.
AUTHOR
Arnd Bergmann <arndb@de.ibm.com>
SEE ALSO
capabilities(7), close(2), spu_create(2), spufs(7)
Linux 2005-09-28 SPU_RUN(2)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SPU_CREATE(2) Linux Programmer's Manual SPU_CREATE(2)
NAME
spu_create - create a new spu context
SYNOPSIS
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/spu.h>
int spu_create(const char *pathname, int flags, mode_t mode);
DESCRIPTION
The spu_create system call is used on PowerPC machines that implement
the Cell Broadband Engine Architecture in order to access Synergistic
Processor Units (SPUs). It creates a new logical context for an SPU in
pathname and returns a handle to associated with it. pathname must
point to a non-existing directory in the mount point of the SPU file
system (spufs). When spu_create is successful, a directory gets cre-
ated on pathname and it is populated with files.
The returned file handle can only be passed to spu_run(2) or closed,
other operations are not defined on it. When it is closed, all associ-
ated directory entries in spufs are removed. When the last file handle
pointing either inside of the context directory or to this file
descriptor is closed, the logical SPU context is destroyed.
The parameter flags can be zero or any bitwise or'd combination of the
following constants:
SPU_RAWIO
Allow mapping of some of the hardware registers of the SPU into
user space. This flag requires the CAP_SYS_RAWIO capability, see
capabilities(7).
The mode parameter specifies the permissions used for creating the new
directory in spufs. mode is modified with the user's umask(2) value
and then used for both the directory and the files contained in it. The
file permissions mask out some more bits of mode because they typically
support only read or write access. See stat(2) for a full list of the
possible mode values.
RETURN VALUE
spu_create returns a new file descriptor. It may return -1 to indicate
an error condition and set errno to one of the error codes listed
below.
ERRORS
EACCESS
The current user does not have write access on the spufs mount
point.
EEXIST An SPU context already exists at the given path name.
EFAULT pathname is not a valid string pointer in the current address
space.
EINVAL pathname is not a directory in the spufs mount point.
ELOOP Too many symlinks were found while resolving pathname.
EMFILE The process has reached its maximum open file limit.
ENAMETOOLONG
pathname was too long.
ENFILE The system has reached the global open file limit.
ENOENT Part of pathname could not be resolved.
ENOMEM The kernel could not allocate all resources required.
ENOSPC There are not enough SPU resources available to create a new
context or the user specific limit for the number of SPU con-
texts has been reached.
ENOSYS the functionality is not provided by the current system, because
either the hardware does not provide SPUs or the spufs module is
not loaded.
ENOTDIR
A part of pathname is not a directory.
NOTES
spu_create is meant to be used from libraries that implement a more
abstract interface to SPUs, not to be used from regular applications.
See http://www.bsc.es/projects/deepcomputing/linuxoncell/ for the rec-
ommended libraries.
FILES
pathname must point to a location beneath the mount point of spufs. By
convention, it gets mounted in /spu.
CONFORMING TO
This call is Linux specific and only implemented by the ppc64 architec-
ture. Programs using this system call are not portable.
BUGS
The code does not yet fully implement all features lined out here.
AUTHOR
Arnd Bergmann <arndb@de.ibm.com>
SEE ALSO
capabilities(7), close(2), spu_run(2), spufs(7)
Linux 2005-09-28 SPU_CREATE(2)

21
Documentation/filesystems/sysfs-pci.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -1,4 +1,5 @@
Accessing PCI device resources through sysfs
--------------------------------------------
sysfs, usually mounted at /sys, provides access to PCI resources on platforms
that support it. For example, a given bus might look like this:
@ -47,14 +48,21 @@ files, each with their own function.
binary - file contains binary data
cpumask - file contains a cpumask type
The read only files are informational, writes to them will be ignored.
Writable files can be used to perform actions on the device (e.g. changing
config space, detaching a device). mmapable files are available via an
mmap of the file at offset 0 and can be used to do actual device programming
from userspace. Note that some platforms don't support mmapping of certain
resources, so be sure to check the return value from any attempted mmap.
The read only files are informational, writes to them will be ignored, with
the exception of the 'rom' file. Writable files can be used to perform
actions on the device (e.g. changing config space, detaching a device).
mmapable files are available via an mmap of the file at offset 0 and can be
used to do actual device programming from userspace. Note that some platforms
don't support mmapping of certain resources, so be sure to check the return
value from any attempted mmap.
The 'rom' file is special in that it provides read-only access to the device's
ROM file, if available. It's disabled by default, however, so applications
should write the string "1" to the file to enable it before attempting a read
call, and disable it following the access by writing "0" to the file.
Accessing legacy resources through sysfs
----------------------------------------
Legacy I/O port and ISA memory resources are also provided in sysfs if the
underlying platform supports them. They're located in the PCI class heirarchy,
@ -75,6 +83,7 @@ simply dereference the returned pointer (after checking for errors of course)
to access legacy memory space.
Supporting PCI access on new platforms
--------------------------------------
In order to support PCI resource mapping as described above, Linux platform
code must define HAVE_PCI_MMAP and provide a pci_mmap_page_range function.

12
Documentation/filesystems/tmpfs.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -78,6 +78,18 @@ use up all the memory on the machine; but enhances the scalability of
that instance in a system with many cpus making intensive use of it.
tmpfs has a mount option to set the NUMA memory allocation policy for
all files in that instance:
mpol=interleave prefers to allocate memory from each node in turn
mpol=default prefers to allocate memory from the local node
mpol=bind prefers to allocate from mpol_nodelist
mpol=preferred prefers to allocate from first node in mpol_nodelist
The following mount option is used in conjunction with mpol=interleave,
mpol=bind or mpol=preferred:
mpol_nodelist: nodelist suitable for parsing with nodelist_parse.
To specify the initial root directory you can use the following mount
options:

5
Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -162,9 +162,8 @@ get_sb() method fills in is the "s_op" field. This is a pointer to
a "struct super_operations" which describes the next level of the
filesystem implementation.
Usually, a filesystem uses generic one of the generic get_sb()
implementations and provides a fill_super() method instead. The
generic methods are:
Usually, a filesystem uses one of the generic get_sb() implementations
and provides a fill_super() method instead. The generic methods are:
get_sb_bdev: mount a filesystem residing on a block device

2
Documentation/hpet.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
The High Precision Event Timer (HPET) hardware is the future replacement
for the 8254 and Real Time Clock (RTC) periodic timer functionality.
Each HPET can have up two 32 timers. It is possible to configure the
Each HPET can have up to 32 timers. It is possible to configure the
first two timers as legacy replacements for 8254 and RTC periodic timers.
A specification done by Intel and Microsoft can be found at
<http://www.intel.com/hardwaredesign/hpetspec.htm>.

178
Documentation/hrtimers.txt Normal file
Просмотреть файл

@ -0,0 +1,178 @@
hrtimers - subsystem for high-resolution kernel timers
----------------------------------------------------
This patch introduces a new subsystem for high-resolution kernel timers.
One might ask the question: we already have a timer subsystem
(kernel/timers.c), why do we need two timer subsystems? After a lot of
back and forth trying to integrate high-resolution and high-precision
features into the existing timer framework, and after testing various
such high-resolution timer implementations in practice, we came to the
conclusion that the timer wheel code is fundamentally not suitable for
such an approach. We initially didnt believe this ('there must be a way
to solve this'), and spent a considerable effort trying to integrate
things into the timer wheel, but we failed. In hindsight, there are
several reasons why such integration is hard/impossible:
- the forced handling of low-resolution and high-resolution timers in
the same way leads to a lot of compromises, macro magic and #ifdef
mess. The timers.c code is very "tightly coded" around jiffies and
32-bitness assumptions, and has been honed and micro-optimized for a
relatively narrow use case (jiffies in a relatively narrow HZ range)
for many years - and thus even small extensions to it easily break
the wheel concept, leading to even worse compromises. The timer wheel
code is very good and tight code, there's zero problems with it in its
current usage - but it is simply not suitable to be extended for
high-res timers.
- the unpredictable [O(N)] overhead of cascading leads to delays which
necessiate a more complex handling of high resolution timers, which
in turn decreases robustness. Such a design still led to rather large
timing inaccuracies. Cascading is a fundamental property of the timer
wheel concept, it cannot be 'designed out' without unevitably
degrading other portions of the timers.c code in an unacceptable way.
- the implementation of the current posix-timer subsystem on top of
the timer wheel has already introduced a quite complex handling of
the required readjusting of absolute CLOCK_REALTIME timers at
settimeofday or NTP time - further underlying our experience by
example: that the timer wheel data structure is too rigid for high-res
timers.
- the timer wheel code is most optimal for use cases which can be
identified as "timeouts". Such timeouts are usually set up to cover
error conditions in various I/O paths, such as networking and block
I/O. The vast majority of those timers never expire and are rarely
recascaded because the expected correct event arrives in time so they
can be removed from the timer wheel before any further processing of
them becomes necessary. Thus the users of these timeouts can accept
the granularity and precision tradeoffs of the timer wheel, and
largely expect the timer subsystem to have near-zero overhead.
Accurate timing for them is not a core purpose - in fact most of the
timeout values used are ad-hoc. For them it is at most a necessary
evil to guarantee the processing of actual timeout completions
(because most of the timeouts are deleted before completion), which
should thus be as cheap and unintrusive as possible.
The primary users of precision timers are user-space applications that
utilize nanosleep, posix-timers and itimer interfaces. Also, in-kernel
users like drivers and subsystems which require precise timed events
(e.g. multimedia) can benefit from the availability of a seperate
high-resolution timer subsystem as well.
While this subsystem does not offer high-resolution clock sources just
yet, the hrtimer subsystem can be easily extended with high-resolution
clock capabilities, and patches for that exist and are maturing quickly.
The increasing demand for realtime and multimedia applications along
with other potential users for precise timers gives another reason to
separate the "timeout" and "precise timer" subsystems.
Another potential benefit is that such a seperation allows even more
special-purpose optimization of the existing timer wheel for the low
resolution and low precision use cases - once the precision-sensitive
APIs are separated from the timer wheel and are migrated over to
hrtimers. E.g. we could decrease the frequency of the timeout subsystem
from 250 Hz to 100 HZ (or even smaller).
hrtimer subsystem implementation details
----------------------------------------
the basic design considerations were:
- simplicity
- data structure not bound to jiffies or any other granularity. All the
kernel logic works at 64-bit nanoseconds resolution - no compromises.
- simplification of existing, timing related kernel code
another basic requirement was the immediate enqueueing and ordering of
timers at activation time. After looking at several possible solutions
such as radix trees and hashes, we chose the red black tree as the basic
data structure. Rbtrees are available as a library in the kernel and are
used in various performance-critical areas of e.g. memory management and
file systems. The rbtree is solely used for time sorted ordering, while
a separate list is used to give the expiry code fast access to the
queued timers, without having to walk the rbtree.
(This seperate list is also useful for later when we'll introduce
high-resolution clocks, where we need seperate pending and expired
queues while keeping the time-order intact.)
Time-ordered enqueueing is not purely for the purposes of
high-resolution clocks though, it also simplifies the handling of
absolute timers based on a low-resolution CLOCK_REALTIME. The existing
implementation needed to keep an extra list of all armed absolute
CLOCK_REALTIME timers along with complex locking. In case of
settimeofday and NTP, all the timers (!) had to be dequeued, the
time-changing code had to fix them up one by one, and all of them had to
be enqueued again. The time-ordered enqueueing and the storage of the
expiry time in absolute time units removes all this complex and poorly
scaling code from the posix-timer implementation - the clock can simply
be set without having to touch the rbtree. This also makes the handling
of posix-timers simpler in general.
The locking and per-CPU behavior of hrtimers was mostly taken from the
existing timer wheel code, as it is mature and well suited. Sharing code
was not really a win, due to the different data structures. Also, the
hrtimer functions now have clearer behavior and clearer names - such as
hrtimer_try_to_cancel() and hrtimer_cancel() [which are roughly
equivalent to del_timer() and del_timer_sync()] - so there's no direct
1:1 mapping between them on the algorithmical level, and thus no real
potential for code sharing either.
Basic data types: every time value, absolute or relative, is in a
special nanosecond-resolution type: ktime_t. The kernel-internal
representation of ktime_t values and operations is implemented via
macros and inline functions, and can be switched between a "hybrid
union" type and a plain "scalar" 64bit nanoseconds representation (at
compile time). The hybrid union type optimizes time conversions on 32bit
CPUs. This build-time-selectable ktime_t storage format was implemented
to avoid the performance impact of 64-bit multiplications and divisions
on 32bit CPUs. Such operations are frequently necessary to convert
between the storage formats provided by kernel and userspace interfaces
and the internal time format. (See include/linux/ktime.h for further
details.)
hrtimers - rounding of timer values
-----------------------------------
the hrtimer code will round timer events to lower-resolution clocks
because it has to. Otherwise it will do no artificial rounding at all.
one question is, what resolution value should be returned to the user by
the clock_getres() interface. This will return whatever real resolution
a given clock has - be it low-res, high-res, or artificially-low-res.
hrtimers - testing and verification
----------------------------------
We used the high-resolution clock subsystem ontop of hrtimers to verify
the hrtimer implementation details in praxis, and we also ran the posix
timer tests in order to ensure specification compliance. We also ran
tests on low-resolution clocks.
The hrtimer patch converts the following kernel functionality to use
hrtimers:
- nanosleep
- itimers
- posix-timers
The conversion of nanosleep and posix-timers enabled the unification of
nanosleep and clock_nanosleep.
The code was successfully compiled for the following platforms:
i386, x86_64, ARM, PPC, PPC64, IA64
The code was run-tested on the following platforms:
i386(UP/SMP), x86_64(UP/SMP), ARM, PPC
hrtimers were also integrated into the -rt tree, along with a
hrtimers-based high-resolution clock implementation, so the hrtimers
code got a healthy amount of testing and use in practice.
Thomas Gleixner, Ingo Molnar

19
Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf
Просмотреть файл

@ -54,13 +54,16 @@ If you really want i2c accesses for these Super I/O chips,
use the w83781d driver. However this is not the preferred method
now that this ISA driver has been developed.
Technically, the w83627thf does not support a VID reading. However, it's
possible or even likely that your mainboard maker has routed these signals
to a specific set of general purpose IO pins (the Asus P4C800-E is one such
board). The w83627thf driver now interprets these as VID. If the VID on
your board doesn't work, first see doc/vid in the lm_sensors package. If
that still doesn't help, email us at lm-sensors@lm-sensors.org.
The w83627_HF_ uses pins 110-106 as VID0-VID4. The w83627_THF_ uses the
same pins as GPIO[0:4]. Technically, the w83627_THF_ does not support a
VID reading. However the two chips have the identical 128 pin package. So,
it is possible or even likely for a w83627thf to have the VID signals routed
to these pins despite their not being labeled for that purpose. Therefore,
the w83627thf driver interprets these as VID. If the VID on your board
doesn't work, first see doc/vid in the lm_sensors package[1]. If that still
doesn't help, you may just ignore the bogus VID reading with no harm done.
For further information on this driver see the w83781d driver
documentation.
For further information on this driver see the w83781d driver documentation.
[1] http://www2.lm-sensors.nu/~lm78/cvs/browse.cgi/lm_sensors2/doc/vid

3
Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-nforce2
Просмотреть файл

@ -5,7 +5,8 @@ Supported adapters:
* nForce2 Ultra 400 MCP 10de:0084
* nForce3 Pro150 MCP 10de:00D4
* nForce3 250Gb MCP 10de:00E4
* nForce4 MCP 10de:0052
* nForce4 MCP 10de:0052
* nForce4 MCP-04 10de:0034
Datasheet: not publically available, but seems to be similar to the
AMD-8111 SMBus 2.0 adapter.

1
Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-parport
Просмотреть файл

@ -17,6 +17,7 @@ It currently supports the following devices:
* Velleman K8000 adapter
* ELV adapter
* Analog Devices evaluation boards (ADM1025, ADM1030, ADM1031, ADM1032)
* Barco LPT->DVI (K5800236) adapter
These devices use different pinout configurations, so you have to tell
the driver what you have, using the type module parameter. There is no

86
Documentation/i2c/porting-clients
Просмотреть файл

@ -1,10 +1,13 @@
Revision 5, 2005-07-29
Revision 6, 2005-11-20
Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
Greg KH <greg@kroah.com>
This is a guide on how to convert I2C chip drivers from Linux 2.4 to
Linux 2.6. I have been using existing drivers (lm75, lm78) as examples.
Then I converted a driver myself (lm83) and updated this document.
Note that this guide is strongly oriented towards hardware monitoring
drivers. Many points are still valid for other type of drivers, but
others may be irrelevant.
There are two sets of points below. The first set concerns technical
changes. The second set concerns coding policy. Both are mandatory.
@ -22,16 +25,20 @@ Technical changes:
#include <linux/module.h>
#include <linux/init.h>
#include <linux/slab.h>
#include <linux/jiffies.h>
#include <linux/i2c.h>
#include <linux/i2c-isa.h> /* for ISA drivers */
#include <linux/hwmon.h> /* for hardware monitoring drivers */
#include <linux/hwmon-sysfs.h>
#include <linux/hwmon-vid.h> /* if you need VRM support */
#include <linux/err.h> /* for class registration */
#include <asm/io.h> /* if you have I/O operations */
Please respect this inclusion order. Some extra headers may be
required for a given driver (e.g. "lm75.h").
* [Addresses] SENSORS_I2C_END becomes I2C_CLIENT_END, ISA addresses
are no more handled by the i2c core.
are no more handled by the i2c core. Address ranges are no more
supported either, define each individual address separately.
SENSORS_INSMOD_<n> becomes I2C_CLIENT_INSMOD_<n>.
* [Client data] Get rid of sysctl_id. Try using standard names for
@ -48,23 +55,23 @@ Technical changes:
int kind);
static void lm75_init_client(struct i2c_client *client);
static int lm75_detach_client(struct i2c_client *client);
static void lm75_update_client(struct i2c_client *client);
static struct lm75_data lm75_update_device(struct device *dev);
* [Sysctl] All sysctl stuff is of course gone (defines, ctl_table
and functions). Instead, you have to define show and set functions for
each sysfs file. Only define set for writable values. Take a look at an
existing 2.6 driver for details (lm78 for example). Don't forget
existing 2.6 driver for details (it87 for example). Don't forget
to define the attributes for each file (this is that step that
links callback functions). Use the file names specified in
Documentation/i2c/sysfs-interface for the individual files. Also
Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface for the individual files. Also
convert the units these files read and write to the specified ones.
If you need to add a new type of file, please discuss it on the
sensors mailing list <lm-sensors@lm-sensors.org> by providing a
patch to the Documentation/i2c/sysfs-interface file.
patch to the Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface file.
* [Attach] For I2C drivers, the attach function should make sure
that the adapter's class has I2C_CLASS_HWMON, using the
following construct:
that the adapter's class has I2C_CLASS_HWMON (or whatever class is
suitable for your driver), using the following construct:
if (!(adapter->class & I2C_CLASS_HWMON))
return 0;
ISA-only drivers of course don't need this.
@ -72,63 +79,72 @@ Technical changes:
* [Detect] As mentioned earlier, the flags parameter is gone.
The type_name and client_name strings are replaced by a single
name string, which will be filled with a lowercase, short string
(typically the driver name, e.g. "lm75").
name string, which will be filled with a lowercase, short string.
In i2c-only drivers, drop the i2c_is_isa_adapter check, it's
useless. Same for isa-only drivers, as the test would always be
true. Only hybrid drivers (which are quite rare) still need it.
The errorN labels are reduced to the number needed. If that number
is 2 (i2c-only drivers), it is advised that the labels are named
exit and exit_free. For i2c+isa drivers, labels should be named
ERROR0, ERROR1 and ERROR2. Don't forget to properly set err before
The labels used for error paths are reduced to the number needed.
It is advised that the labels are given descriptive names such as
exit and exit_free. Don't forget to properly set err before
jumping to error labels. By the way, labels should be left-aligned.
Use kzalloc instead of kmalloc.
Use i2c_set_clientdata to set the client data (as opposed to
a direct access to client->data).
Use strlcpy instead of strcpy to copy the client name.
Use strlcpy instead of strcpy or snprintf to copy the client name.
Replace the sysctl directory registration by calls to
device_create_file. Move the driver initialization before any
sysfs file creation.
Register the client with the hwmon class (using hwmon_device_register)
if applicable.
Drop client->id.
Drop any 24RF08 corruption prevention you find, as this is now done
at the i2c-core level, and doing it twice voids it.
Don't add I2C_CLIENT_ALLOW_USE to client->flags, it's the default now.
* [Init] Limits must not be set by the driver (can be done later in
user-space). Chip should not be reset default (although a module
parameter may be used to force is), and initialization should be
parameter may be used to force it), and initialization should be
limited to the strictly necessary steps.
* [Detach] Get rid of data, remove the call to
i2c_deregister_entry. Do not log an error message if
i2c_detach_client fails, as i2c-core will now do it for you.
* [Detach] Remove the call to i2c_deregister_entry. Do not log an
error message if i2c_detach_client fails, as i2c-core will now do
it for you.
Unregister from the hwmon class if applicable.
* [Update] Don't access client->data directly, use
i2c_get_clientdata(client) instead.
* [Update] The function prototype changed, it is now
passed a device structure, which you have to convert to a client
using to_i2c_client(dev). The update function should return a
pointer to the client data.
Don't access client->data directly, use i2c_get_clientdata(client)
instead.
Use time_after() instead of direct jiffies comparison.
* [Interface] Init function should not print anything. Make sure
there is a MODULE_LICENSE() line, at the bottom of the file
(after MODULE_AUTHOR() and MODULE_DESCRIPTION(), in this order).
* [Interface] Make sure there is a MODULE_LICENSE() line, at the bottom
of the file (after MODULE_AUTHOR() and MODULE_DESCRIPTION(), in this
order).
* [Driver] The flags field of the i2c_driver structure is gone.
I2C_DF_NOTIFY is now the default behavior.
The i2c_driver structure has a driver member, which is itself a
structure, those name member should be initialized to a driver name
string. i2c_driver itself has no name member anymore.
Coding policy:
* [Copyright] Use (C), not (c), for copyright.
* [Debug/log] Get rid of #ifdef DEBUG/#endif constructs whenever you
can. Calls to printk/pr_debug for debugging purposes are replaced
by calls to dev_dbg. Here is an example on how to call it (taken
from lm75_detect):
can. Calls to printk for debugging purposes are replaced by calls to
dev_dbg where possible, else to pr_debug. Here is an example of how
to call it (taken from lm75_detect):
dev_dbg(&client->dev, "Starting lm75 update\n");
Replace other printk calls with the dev_info, dev_err or dev_warn
function, as appropriate.
* [Constants] Constants defines (registers, conversions, initial
values) should be aligned. This greatly improves readability.
Same goes for variables declarations. Alignments are achieved by the
means of tabs, not spaces. Remember that tabs are set to 8 in the
Linux kernel code.
* [Structure definition] The name field should be standardized. All
lowercase and as simple as the driver name itself (e.g. "lm75").
* [Constants] Constants defines (registers, conversions) should be
aligned. This greatly improves readability.
Alignments are achieved by the means of tabs, not spaces. Remember
that tabs are set to 8 in the Linux kernel code.
* [Layout] Avoid extra empty lines between comments and what they
comment. Respect the coding style (see Documentation/CodingStyle),

20
Documentation/i2c/writing-clients
Просмотреть файл

@ -25,9 +25,9 @@ routines, a client structure specific information like the actual I2C
address.
static struct i2c_driver foo_driver = {
.owner = THIS_MODULE,
.name = "Foo version 2.3 driver",
.flags = I2C_DF_NOTIFY,
.driver = {
.name = "foo",
},
.attach_adapter = &foo_attach_adapter,
.detach_client = &foo_detach_client,
.command = &foo_command /* may be NULL */
@ -36,10 +36,6 @@ static struct i2c_driver foo_driver = {
The name field must match the driver name, including the case. It must not
contain spaces, and may be up to 31 characters long.
Don't worry about the flags field; just put I2C_DF_NOTIFY into it. This
means that your driver will be notified when new adapters are found.
This is almost always what you want.
All other fields are for call-back functions which will be explained
below.
@ -496,17 +492,13 @@ Note that some functions are marked by `__init', and some data structures
by `__init_data'. Hose functions and structures can be removed after
kernel booting (or module loading) is completed.
Command function
================
A generic ioctl-like function call back is supported. You will seldom
need this. You may even set it to NULL.
/* No commands defined */
int foo_command(struct i2c_client *client, unsigned int cmd, void *arg)
{
return 0;
}
need this, and its use is deprecated anyway, so newer design should not
use it. Set it to NULL.
Sending and receiving

2
Documentation/i2o/ioctl
Просмотреть файл

@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ VII. Getting Parameters
ENOMEM Kernel memory allocation error
A return value of 0 does not mean that the value was actually
properly retreived. The user should check the result list
properly retrieved. The user should check the result list
to determine the specific status of the transaction.
VIII. Downloading Software

5
Documentation/input/appletouch.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Apple Touchpad Driver (appletouch)
Copyright (C) 2005 Stelian Pop <stelian@popies.net>
appletouch is a Linux kernel driver for the USB touchpad found on post
February 2005 Apple Alu Powerbooks.
February 2005 and October 2005 Apple Aluminium Powerbooks.
This driver is derived from Johannes Berg's appletrackpad driver[1], but it has
been improved in some areas:
@ -13,7 +13,8 @@ been improved in some areas:
Credits go to Johannes Berg for reverse-engineering the touchpad protocol,
Frank Arnold for further improvements, and Alex Harper for some additional
information about the inner workings of the touchpad sensors.
information about the inner workings of the touchpad sensors. Michael
Hanselmann added support for the October 2005 models.
Usage:
------

2
Documentation/input/ff.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ to the unique id assigned by the driver. This data is required for performing
some operations (removing an effect, controlling the playback).
This if field must be set to -1 by the user in order to tell the driver to
allocate a new effect.
See <linux/input.h> for a description of the ff_effect stuct. You should also
See <linux/input.h> for a description of the ff_effect struct. You should also
find help in a few sketches, contained in files shape.fig and interactive.fig.
You need xfig to visualize these files.

2
Documentation/ioctl/hdio.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -946,7 +946,7 @@ HDIO_SCAN_HWIF register and (re)scan interface
This ioctl initializes the addresses and irq for a disk
controller, probes for drives, and creates /proc/ide
interfaces as appropiate.
interfaces as appropriate.

4
Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -1033,9 +1033,9 @@ When kbuild executes the following steps are followed (roughly):
Example:
#arch/i386/Makefile
GCC_VERSION := $(call cc-version)
cflags-y += $(shell \
if [ $(GCC_VERSION) -ge 0300 ] ; then echo "-mregparm=3"; fi ;)
if [ $(call cc-version) -ge 0300 ] ; then \
echo "-mregparm=3"; fi ;)
In the above example -mregparm=3 is only used for gcc version greater
than or equal to gcc 3.0.

64
Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -18,6 +18,7 @@ In this document you will find information about:
=== 5. Include files
--- 5.1 How to include files from the kernel include dir
--- 5.2 External modules using an include/ dir
--- 5.3 External modules using several directories
=== 6. Module installation
--- 6.1 INSTALL_MOD_PATH
--- 6.2 INSTALL_MOD_DIR
@ -38,7 +39,7 @@ included in the kernel tree.
What is covered within this file is mainly information to authors
of modules. The author of an external modules should supply
a makefile that hides most of the complexity so one only has to type
'make' to buld the module. A complete example will be present in
'make' to build the module. A complete example will be present in
chapter ¤. Creating a kbuild file for an external module".
@ -69,7 +70,7 @@ when building an external module.
--- 2.2 Available targets
$KDIR refers to path to kernel source top-level directory
$KDIR refers to the path to the kernel source top-level directory
make -C $KDIR M=`pwd`
Will build the module(s) located in current directory.
@ -87,11 +88,11 @@ when building an external module.
make -C $KDIR M=$PWD modules_install
Install the external module(s).
Installation default is in /lib/modules/<kernel-version>/extra,
but may be prefixed with INSTALL_MOD_PATH - see separate chater.
but may be prefixed with INSTALL_MOD_PATH - see separate chapter.
make -C $KDIR M=$PWD clean
Remove all generated files for the module - the kernel
source directory is not moddified.
source directory is not modified.
make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` help
help will list the available target when building external
@ -99,7 +100,7 @@ when building an external module.
--- 2.3 Available options:
$KDIR refer to path to kernel src
$KDIR refers to the path to the kernel source top-level directory
make -C $KDIR
Used to specify where to find the kernel source.
@ -206,11 +207,11 @@ following files:
KERNELDIR := /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build
all::
$(MAKE) -C $KERNELDIR M=`pwd` $@
$(MAKE) -C $(KERNELDIR) M=`pwd` $@
# Module specific targets
genbin:
echo "X" > 8123_bini.o_shipped
echo "X" > 8123_bin.o_shipped
endif
@ -341,13 +342,52 @@ directory and therefore needs to deal with this in their kbuild file.
EXTRA_CFLAGS := -Iinclude
8123-y := 8123_if.o 8123_pci.o 8123_bin.o
Note that in the assingment there is no space between -I and the path.
This is a kbuild limitation and no space must be present.
Note that in the assignment there is no space between -I and the path.
This is a kbuild limitation: there must be no space present.
--- 5.3 External modules using several directories
If an external module does not follow the usual kernel style but
decide to spread files over several directories then kbuild can
support this too.
Consider the following example:
|
+- src/complex_main.c
| +- hal/hardwareif.c
| +- hal/include/hardwareif.h
+- include/complex.h
To build a single module named complex.ko we then need the following
kbuild file:
Kbuild:
obj-m := complex.o
complex-y := src/complex_main.o
complex-y += src/hal/hardwareif.o
EXTRA_CFLAGS := -I$(src)/include
EXTRA_CFLAGS += -I$(src)src/hal/include
kbuild knows how to handle .o files located in another directory -
although this is NOT reccommended practice. The syntax is to specify
the directory relative to the directory where the Kbuild file is
located.
To find the .h files we have to explicitly tell kbuild where to look
for the .h files. When kbuild executes current directory is always
the root of the kernel tree (argument to -C) and therefore we have to
tell kbuild how to find the .h files using absolute paths.
$(src) will specify the absolute path to the directory where the
Kbuild file are located when being build as an external module.
Therefore -I$(src)/ is used to point out the directory of the Kbuild
file and any additional path are just appended.
=== 6. Module installation
Modules which are included in the kernel is installed in the directory:
Modules which are included in the kernel are installed in the directory:
/lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/kernel
@ -365,7 +405,7 @@ External modules are installed in the directory:
=> Install dir: /frodo/lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/kernel
INSTALL_MOD_PATH may be set as an ordinary shell variable or as in the
example above be specified on the commandline when calling make.
example above be specified on the command line when calling make.
INSTALL_MOD_PATH has effect both when installing modules included in
the kernel as well as when installing external modules.
@ -384,7 +424,7 @@ External modules are installed in the directory:
=== 7. Module versioning
Module versioning are enabled by the CONFIG_MODVERSIONS tag.
Module versioning is enabled by the CONFIG_MODVERSIONS tag.
Module versioning is used as a simple ABI consistency check. The Module
versioning creates a CRC value of the full prototype for an exported symbol and

22
Documentation/kdump/gdbmacros.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -177,3 +177,25 @@ document trapinfo
'trapinfo <pid>' will tell you by which trap & possibly
addresthe kernel paniced.
end
define dmesg
set $i = 0
set $end_idx = (log_end - 1) & (log_buf_len - 1)
while ($i < logged_chars)
set $idx = (log_end - 1 - logged_chars + $i) & (log_buf_len - 1)
if ($idx + 100 <= $end_idx) || \
($end_idx <= $idx && $idx + 100 < log_buf_len)
printf "%.100s", &log_buf[$idx]
set $i = $i + 100
else
printf "%c", log_buf[$idx]
set $i = $i + 1
end
end
end
document dmesg
print the kernel ring buffer
end

137
Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -4,10 +4,10 @@ Documentation for kdump - the kexec-based crash dumping solution
DESIGN
======
Kdump uses kexec to reboot to a second kernel whenever a dump needs to be taken.
This second kernel is booted with very little memory. The first kernel reserves
the section of memory that the second kernel uses. This ensures that on-going
DMA from the first kernel does not corrupt the second kernel.
Kdump uses kexec to reboot to a second kernel whenever a dump needs to be
taken. This second kernel is booted with very little memory. The first kernel
reserves the section of memory that the second kernel uses. This ensures that
on-going DMA from the first kernel does not corrupt the second kernel.
All the necessary information about Core image is encoded in ELF format and
stored in reserved area of memory before crash. Physical address of start of
@ -35,77 +35,82 @@ In the second kernel, "old memory" can be accessed in two ways.
SETUP
=====
1) Download http://www.xmission.com/~ebiederm/files/kexec/kexec-tools-1.101.tar.gz
and apply http://lse.sourceforge.net/kdump/patches/kexec-tools-1.101-kdump.patch
and after that build the source.
1) Download the upstream kexec-tools userspace package from
http://www.xmission.com/~ebiederm/files/kexec/kexec-tools-1.101.tar.gz.
2) Download and build the appropriate (2.6.13-rc1 onwards) vanilla kernel.
Apply the latest consolidated kdump patch on top of kexec-tools-1.101
from http://lse.sourceforge.net/kdump/. This arrangment has been made
till all the userspace patches supporting kdump are integrated with
upstream kexec-tools userspace.
2) Download and build the appropriate (2.6.13-rc1 onwards) vanilla kernels.
Two kernels need to be built in order to get this feature working.
Following are the steps to properly configure the two kernels specific
to kexec and kdump features:
A) First kernel:
A) First kernel or regular kernel:
----------------------------------
a) Enable "kexec system call" feature (in Processor type and features).
CONFIG_KEXEC=y
b) This kernel's physical load address should be the default value of
0x100000 (0x100000, 1 MB) (in Processor type and features).
CONFIG_PHYSICAL_START=0x100000
c) Enable "sysfs file system support" (in Pseudo filesystems).
CONFIG_SYSFS=y
CONFIG_KEXEC=y
b) Enable "sysfs file system support" (in Pseudo filesystems).
CONFIG_SYSFS=y
c) make
d) Boot into first kernel with the command line parameter "crashkernel=Y@X".
Use appropriate values for X and Y. Y denotes how much memory to reserve
for the second kernel, and X denotes at what physical address the reserved
memory section starts. For example: "crashkernel=64M@16M".
for the second kernel, and X denotes at what physical address the
reserved memory section starts. For example: "crashkernel=64M@16M".
B) Second kernel:
a) Enable "kernel crash dumps" feature (in Processor type and features).
CONFIG_CRASH_DUMP=y
b) Specify a suitable value for "Physical address where the kernel is
loaded" (in Processor type and features). Typically this value
should be same as X (See option d) above, e.g., 16 MB or 0x1000000.
CONFIG_PHYSICAL_START=0x1000000
c) Enable "/proc/vmcore support" (Optional, in Pseudo filesystems).
CONFIG_PROC_VMCORE=y
d) Disable SMP support and build a UP kernel (Until it is fixed).
CONFIG_SMP=n
e) Enable "Local APIC support on uniprocessors".
CONFIG_X86_UP_APIC=y
f) Enable "IO-APIC support on uniprocessors"
CONFIG_X86_UP_IOAPIC=y
Note: i) Options a) and b) depend upon "Configure standard kernel features
(for small systems)" (under General setup).
ii) Option a) also depends on CONFIG_HIGHMEM (under Processor
type and features).
iii) Both option a) and b) are under "Processor type and features".
B) Second kernel or dump capture kernel:
---------------------------------------
a) For i386 architecture enable Highmem support
CONFIG_HIGHMEM=y
b) Enable "kernel crash dumps" feature (under "Processor type and features")
CONFIG_CRASH_DUMP=y
c) Make sure a suitable value for "Physical address where the kernel is
loaded" (under "Processor type and features"). By default this value
is 0x1000000 (16MB) and it should be same as X (See option d above),
e.g., 16 MB or 0x1000000.
CONFIG_PHYSICAL_START=0x1000000
d) Enable "/proc/vmcore support" (Optional, under "Pseudo filesystems").
CONFIG_PROC_VMCORE=y
3) Boot into the first kernel. You are now ready to try out kexec-based crash
dumps.
4) Load the second kernel to be booted using:
3) After booting to regular kernel or first kernel, load the second kernel
using the following command:
kexec -p <second-kernel> --args-linux --elf32-core-headers
--append="root=<root-dev> init 1 irqpoll"
--append="root=<root-dev> init 1 irqpoll maxcpus=1"
Note: i) <second-kernel> has to be a vmlinux image. bzImage will not work,
as of now.
ii) By default ELF headers are stored in ELF64 format. Option
--elf32-core-headers forces generation of ELF32 headers. gdb can
not open ELF64 headers on 32 bit systems. So creating ELF32
headers can come handy for users who have got non-PAE systems and
hence have memory less than 4GB.
iii) Specify "irqpoll" as command line parameter. This reduces driver
initialization failures in second kernel due to shared interrupts.
iv) <root-dev> needs to be specified in a format corresponding to
the root device name in the output of mount command.
v) If you have built the drivers required to mount root file
system as modules in <second-kernel>, then, specify
--initrd=<initrd-for-second-kernel>.
Notes:
======
i) <second-kernel> has to be a vmlinux image ie uncompressed elf image.
bzImage will not work, as of now.
ii) --args-linux has to be speicfied as if kexec it loading an elf image,
it needs to know that the arguments supplied are of linux type.
iii) By default ELF headers are stored in ELF64 format to support systems
with more than 4GB memory. Option --elf32-core-headers forces generation
of ELF32 headers. The reason for this option being, as of now gdb can
not open vmcore file with ELF64 headers on a 32 bit systems. So ELF32
headers can be used if one has non-PAE systems and hence memory less
than 4GB.
iv) Specify "irqpoll" as command line parameter. This reduces driver
initialization failures in second kernel due to shared interrupts.
v) <root-dev> needs to be specified in a format corresponding to the root
device name in the output of mount command.
vi) If you have built the drivers required to mount root file system as
modules in <second-kernel>, then, specify
--initrd=<initrd-for-second-kernel>.
vii) Specify maxcpus=1 as, if during first kernel run, if panic happens on
non-boot cpus, second kernel doesn't seem to be boot up all the cpus.
The other option is to always built the second kernel without SMP
support ie CONFIG_SMP=n
5) System reboots into the second kernel when a panic occurs. A module can be
written to force the panic or "ALT-SysRq-c" can be used initiate a crash
dump for testing purposes.
4) After successfully loading the second kernel as above, if a panic occurs
system reboots into the second kernel. A module can be written to force
the panic or "ALT-SysRq-c" can be used initiate a crash dump for testing
purposes.
6) Write out the dump file using
5) Once the second kernel has booted, write out the dump file using
cp /proc/vmcore <dump-file>
@ -119,9 +124,9 @@ SETUP
Entire memory: dd if=/dev/oldmem of=oldmem.001
ANALYSIS
========
Limited analysis can be done using gdb on the dump file copied out of
/proc/vmcore. Use vmlinux built with -g and run
@ -132,15 +137,19 @@ work fine.
Note: gdb cannot analyse core files generated in ELF64 format for i386.
Latest "crash" (crash-4.0-2.18) as available on Dave Anderson's site
http://people.redhat.com/~anderson/ works well with kdump format.
TODO
====
1) Provide a kernel pages filtering mechanism so that core file size is not
insane on systems having huge memory banks.
2) Modify "crash" tool to make it recognize this dump.
2) Relocatable kernel can help in maintaining multiple kernels for crashdump
and same kernel as the first kernel can be used to capture the dump.
CONTACT
=======
Vivek Goyal (vgoyal@in.ibm.com)
Maneesh Soni (maneesh@in.ibm.com)

80
Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -471,14 +471,15 @@ running once the system is up.
arch/i386/kernel/cpu/cpufreq/elanfreq.c.
elevator= [IOSCHED]
Format: {"as" | "cfq" | "deadline" | "noop"}
Format: {"anticipatory" | "cfq" | "deadline" | "noop"}
See Documentation/block/as-iosched.txt and
Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt for details.
elfcorehdr= [IA-32]
elfcorehdr= [IA-32, X86_64]
Specifies physical address of start of kernel core
image elf header.
See Documentation/kdump.txt for details.
image elf header. Generally kexec loader will
pass this option to capture kernel.
See Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt for details.
enforcing [SELINUX] Set initial enforcing status.
Format: {"0" | "1"}
@ -711,9 +712,17 @@ running once the system is up.
load_ramdisk= [RAM] List of ramdisks to load from floppy
See Documentation/ramdisk.txt.
lockd.udpport= [NFS]
lockd.nlm_grace_period=P [NFS] Assign grace period.
Format: <integer>
lockd.tcpport= [NFS]
lockd.nlm_tcpport=N [NFS] Assign TCP port.
Format: <integer>
lockd.nlm_timeout=T [NFS] Assign timeout value.
Format: <integer>
lockd.nlm_udpport=M [NFS] Assign UDP port.
Format: <integer>
logibm.irq= [HW,MOUSE] Logitech Bus Mouse Driver
Format: <irq>
@ -832,7 +841,7 @@ running once the system is up.
mem=nopentium [BUGS=IA-32] Disable usage of 4MB pages for kernel
memory.
memmap=exactmap [KNL,IA-32] Enable setting of an exact
memmap=exactmap [KNL,IA-32,X86_64] Enable setting of an exact
E820 memory map, as specified by the user.
Such memmap=exactmap lines can be constructed based on
BIOS output or other requirements. See the memmap=nn@ss
@ -855,6 +864,49 @@ running once the system is up.
mga= [HW,DRM]
migration_cost=
[KNL,SMP] debug: override scheduler migration costs
Format: <level-1-usecs>,<level-2-usecs>,...
This debugging option can be used to override the
default scheduler migration cost matrix. The numbers
are indexed by 'CPU domain distance'.
E.g. migration_cost=1000,2000,3000 on an SMT NUMA
box will set up an intra-core migration cost of
1 msec, an inter-core migration cost of 2 msecs,
and an inter-node migration cost of 3 msecs.
WARNING: using the wrong values here can break
scheduler performance, so it's only for scheduler
development purposes, not production environments.
migration_debug=
[KNL,SMP] migration cost auto-detect verbosity
Format=<0|1|2>
If a system's migration matrix reported at bootup
seems erroneous then this option can be used to
increase verbosity of the detection process.
We default to 0 (no extra messages), 1 will print
some more information, and 2 will be really
verbose (probably only useful if you also have a
serial console attached to the system).
migration_factor=
[KNL,SMP] multiply/divide migration costs by a factor
Format=<percent>
This debug option can be used to proportionally
increase or decrease the auto-detected migration
costs for all entries of the migration matrix.
E.g. migration_factor=150 will increase migration
costs by 50%. (and thus the scheduler will be less
eager migrating cache-hot tasks)
migration_factor=80 will decrease migration costs
by 20%. (thus the scheduler will be more eager to
migrate tasks)
WARNING: using the wrong values here can break
scheduler performance, so it's only for scheduler
development purposes, not production environments.
mousedev.tap_time=
[MOUSE] Maximum time between finger touching and
leaving touchpad surface for touch to be considered
@ -910,6 +962,14 @@ running once the system is up.
nfsroot= [NFS] nfs root filesystem for disk-less boxes.
See Documentation/nfsroot.txt.
nfs.callback_tcpport=
[NFS] set the TCP port on which the NFSv4 callback
channel should listen.
nfs.idmap_cache_timeout=
[NFS] set the maximum lifetime for idmapper cache
entries.
nmi_watchdog= [KNL,BUGS=IA-32] Debugging features for SMP kernels
no387 [BUGS=IA-32] Tells the kernel to use the 387 maths
@ -990,6 +1050,8 @@ running once the system is up.
nowb [ARM]
nr_uarts= [SERIAL] maximum number of UARTs to be registered.
opl3= [HW,OSS]
Format: <io>
@ -1168,6 +1230,10 @@ running once the system is up.
Limit processor to maximum C-state
max_cstate=9 overrides any DMI blacklist limit.
processor.nocst [HW,ACPI]
Ignore the _CST method to determine C-states,
instead using the legacy FADT method
prompt_ramdisk= [RAM] List of RAM disks to prompt for floppy disk
before loading.
See Documentation/ramdisk.txt.

22
Documentation/keys-request-key.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -56,10 +56,12 @@ A request proceeds in the following manner:
(4) request_key() then forks and executes /sbin/request-key with a new session
keyring that contains a link to auth key V.
(5) /sbin/request-key execs an appropriate program to perform the actual
(5) /sbin/request-key assumes the authority associated with key U.
(6) /sbin/request-key execs an appropriate program to perform the actual
instantiation.
(6) The program may want to access another key from A's context (say a
(7) The program may want to access another key from A's context (say a
Kerberos TGT key). It just requests the appropriate key, and the keyring
search notes that the session keyring has auth key V in its bottom level.
@ -67,19 +69,19 @@ A request proceeds in the following manner:
UID, GID, groups and security info of process A as if it was process A,
and come up with key W.
(7) The program then does what it must to get the data with which to
(8) The program then does what it must to get the data with which to
instantiate key U, using key W as a reference (perhaps it contacts a
Kerberos server using the TGT) and then instantiates key U.
(8) Upon instantiating key U, auth key V is automatically revoked so that it
(9) Upon instantiating key U, auth key V is automatically revoked so that it
may not be used again.
(9) The program then exits 0 and request_key() deletes key V and returns key
(10) The program then exits 0 and request_key() deletes key V and returns key
U to the caller.
This also extends further. If key W (step 5 above) didn't exist, key W would be
created uninstantiated, another auth key (X) would be created [as per step 3]
and another copy of /sbin/request-key spawned [as per step 4]; but the context
This also extends further. If key W (step 7 above) didn't exist, key W would be
created uninstantiated, another auth key (X) would be created (as per step 3)
and another copy of /sbin/request-key spawned (as per step 4); but the context
specified by auth key X will still be process A, as it was in auth key V.
This is because process A's keyrings can't simply be attached to
@ -138,8 +140,8 @@ until one succeeds:
(3) The process's session keyring is searched.
(4) If the process has a request_key() authorisation key in its session
keyring then:
(4) If the process has assumed the authority associated with a request_key()
authorisation key then:
(a) If extant, the calling process's thread keyring is searched.

61
Documentation/keys.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -308,6 +308,8 @@ process making the call:
KEY_SPEC_USER_KEYRING -4 UID-specific keyring
KEY_SPEC_USER_SESSION_KEYRING -5 UID-session keyring
KEY_SPEC_GROUP_KEYRING -6 GID-specific keyring
KEY_SPEC_REQKEY_AUTH_KEY -7 assumed request_key()
authorisation key
The main syscalls are:
@ -498,7 +500,11 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are:
keyring is full, error ENFILE will result.
The link procedure checks the nesting of the keyrings, returning ELOOP if
it appears to deep or EDEADLK if the link would introduce a cycle.
it appears too deep or EDEADLK if the link would introduce a cycle.
Any links within the keyring to keys that match the new key in terms of
type and description will be discarded from the keyring as the new one is
added.
(*) Unlink a key or keyring from another keyring:
@ -628,6 +634,41 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are:
there is one, otherwise the user default session keyring.
(*) Set the timeout on a key.
long keyctl(KEYCTL_SET_TIMEOUT, key_serial_t key, unsigned timeout);
This sets or clears the timeout on a key. The timeout can be 0 to clear
the timeout or a number of seconds to set the expiry time that far into
the future.
The process must have attribute modification access on a key to set its
timeout. Timeouts may not be set with this function on negative, revoked
or expired keys.
(*) Assume the authority granted to instantiate a key
long keyctl(KEYCTL_ASSUME_AUTHORITY, key_serial_t key);
This assumes or divests the authority required to instantiate the
specified key. Authority can only be assumed if the thread has the
authorisation key associated with the specified key in its keyrings
somewhere.
Once authority is assumed, searches for keys will also search the
requester's keyrings using the requester's security label, UID, GID and
groups.
If the requested authority is unavailable, error EPERM will be returned,
likewise if the authority has been revoked because the target key is
already instantiated.
If the specified key is 0, then any assumed authority will be divested.
The assumed authorititive key is inherited across fork and exec.
===============
KERNEL SERVICES
===============
@ -860,24 +901,6 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory:
It is safe to sleep in this method.
(*) int (*duplicate)(struct key *key, const struct key *source);
If this type of key can be duplicated, then this method should be
provided. It is called to copy the payload attached to the source into the
new key. The data length on the new key will have been updated and the
quota adjusted already.
This method will be called with the source key's semaphore read-locked to
prevent its payload from being changed, thus RCU constraints need not be
applied to the source key.
This method does not have to lock the destination key in order to attach a
payload. The fact that KEY_FLAG_INSTANTIATED is not set in key->flags
prevents anything else from gaining access to the key.
It is safe to sleep in this method.
(*) int (*update)(struct key *key, const void *data, size_t datalen);
If this type of key can be updated, then this method should be provided.

3
Documentation/kprobes.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -411,7 +411,8 @@ int init_module(void)
printk("Couldn't find %s to plant kprobe\n", "do_fork");
return -1;
}
if ((ret = register_kprobe(&kp) < 0)) {
ret = register_kprobe(&kp);
if (ret < 0) {
printk("register_kprobe failed, returned %d\n", ret);
return -1;
}

8
Documentation/laptop-mode.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ How to conserve battery power using laptop-mode
Document Author: Bart Samwel (bart@samwel.tk)
Date created: January 2, 2004
Last modified: July 10, 2004
Last modified: December 06, 2004
Introduction
------------
@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ or anything. Simply install all the files included in this document, and
laptop mode will automatically be started when you're on battery. For
your convenience, a tarball containing an installer can be downloaded at:
http://www.xs4all.nl/~bsamwel/laptop_mode/tools
http://www.xs4all.nl/~bsamwel/laptop_mode/tools/
To configure laptop mode, you need to edit the configuration file, which is
located in /etc/default/laptop-mode on Debian-based systems, or in
@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ MAX_AGE=${MAX_AGE:-'600'}
# Read-ahead, in kilobytes
READAHEAD=${READAHEAD:-'4096'}
# Shall we remount journaled fs. with appropiate commit interval? (1=yes)
# Shall we remount journaled fs. with appropriate commit interval? (1=yes)
DO_REMOUNTS=${DO_REMOUNTS:-'1'}
# And shall we add the "noatime" option to that as well? (1=yes)
@ -912,7 +912,7 @@ void usage()
exit(0);
}
int main(int ac, char **av)
int main(int argc, char **argv)
{
int fd;
char *disk = 0;

17
Documentation/locks.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -65,20 +65,3 @@ The default is to disallow mandatory locking. The intention is that
mandatory locking only be enabled on a local filesystem as the specific need
arises.
Until an updated version of mount(8) becomes available you may have to apply
this patch to the mount sources (based on the version distributed with Rick
Faith's util-linux-2.5 package):
*** mount.c.orig Sat Jun 8 09:14:31 1996
--- mount.c Sat Jun 8 09:13:02 1996
***************
*** 100,105 ****
--- 100,107 ----
{ "noauto", 0, MS_NOAUTO }, /* Can only be mounted explicitly */
{ "user", 0, MS_USER }, /* Allow ordinary user to mount */
{ "nouser", 1, MS_USER }, /* Forbid ordinary user to mount */
+ { "mand", 0, MS_MANDLOCK }, /* Allow mandatory locks on this FS */
+ { "nomand", 1, MS_MANDLOCK }, /* Forbid mandatory locks on this FS */
/* add new options here */
#ifdef MS_NOSUB
{ "sub", 1, MS_NOSUB }, /* allow submounts */

120
Documentation/md.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -51,6 +51,30 @@ superblock can be autodetected and run at boot time.
The kernel parameter "raid=partitionable" (or "raid=part") means
that all auto-detected arrays are assembled as partitionable.
Boot time assembly of degraded/dirty arrays
-------------------------------------------
If a raid5 or raid6 array is both dirty and degraded, it could have
undetectable data corruption. This is because the fact that it is
'dirty' means that the parity cannot be trusted, and the fact that it
is degraded means that some datablocks are missing and cannot reliably
be reconstructed (due to no parity).
For this reason, md will normally refuse to start such an array. This
requires the sysadmin to take action to explicitly start the array
desipite possible corruption. This is normally done with
mdadm --assemble --force ....
This option is not really available if the array has the root
filesystem on it. In order to support this booting from such an
array, md supports a module parameter "start_dirty_degraded" which,
when set to 1, bypassed the checks and will allows dirty degraded
arrays to be started.
So, to boot with a root filesystem of a dirty degraded raid[56], use
md-mod.start_dirty_degraded=1
Superblock formats
------------------
@ -141,6 +165,70 @@ All md devices contain:
in a fully functional array. If this is not yet known, the file
will be empty. If an array is being resized (not currently
possible) this will contain the larger of the old and new sizes.
Some raid level (RAID1) allow this value to be set while the
array is active. This will reconfigure the array. Otherwise
it can only be set while assembling an array.
chunk_size
This is the size if bytes for 'chunks' and is only relevant to
raid levels that involve striping (1,4,5,6,10). The address space
of the array is conceptually divided into chunks and consecutive
chunks are striped onto neighbouring devices.
The size should be atleast PAGE_SIZE (4k) and should be a power
of 2. This can only be set while assembling an array
component_size
For arrays with data redundancy (i.e. not raid0, linear, faulty,
multipath), all components must be the same size - or at least
there must a size that they all provide space for. This is a key
part or the geometry of the array. It is measured in sectors
and can be read from here. Writing to this value may resize
the array if the personality supports it (raid1, raid5, raid6),
and if the component drives are large enough.
metadata_version
This indicates the format that is being used to record metadata
about the array. It can be 0.90 (traditional format), 1.0, 1.1,
1.2 (newer format in varying locations) or "none" indicating that
the kernel isn't managing metadata at all.
level
The raid 'level' for this array. The name will often (but not
always) be the same as the name of the module that implements the
level. To be auto-loaded the module must have an alias
md-$LEVEL e.g. md-raid5
This can be written only while the array is being assembled, not
after it is started.
new_dev
This file can be written but not read. The value written should
be a block device number as major:minor. e.g. 8:0
This will cause that device to be attached to the array, if it is
available. It will then appear at md/dev-XXX (depending on the
name of the device) and further configuration is then possible.
sync_speed_min
sync_speed_max
This are similar to /proc/sys/dev/raid/speed_limit_{min,max}
however they only apply to the particular array.
If no value has been written to these, of if the word 'system'
is written, then the system-wide value is used. If a value,
in kibibytes-per-second is written, then it is used.
When the files are read, they show the currently active value
followed by "(local)" or "(system)" depending on whether it is
a locally set or system-wide value.
sync_completed
This shows the number of sectors that have been completed of
whatever the current sync_action is, followed by the number of
sectors in total that could need to be processed. The two
numbers are separated by a '/' thus effectively showing one
value, a fraction of the process that is complete.
sync_speed
This shows the current actual speed, in K/sec, of the current
sync_action. It is averaged over the last 30 seconds.
As component devices are added to an md array, they appear in the 'md'
directory as new directories named
@ -167,6 +255,38 @@ Each directory contains:
of being recoverred to
This list make grow in future.
errors
An approximate count of read errors that have been detected on
this device but have not caused the device to be evicted from
the array (either because they were corrected or because they
happened while the array was read-only). When using version-1
metadata, this value persists across restarts of the array.
This value can be written while assembling an array thus
providing an ongoing count for arrays with metadata managed by
userspace.
slot
This gives the role that the device has in the array. It will
either be 'none' if the device is not active in the array
(i.e. is a spare or has failed) or an integer less than the
'raid_disks' number for the array indicating which possition
it currently fills. This can only be set while assembling an
array. A device for which this is set is assumed to be working.
offset
This gives the location in the device (in sectors from the
start) where data from the array will be stored. Any part of
the device before this offset us not touched, unless it is
used for storing metadata (Formats 1.1 and 1.2).
size
The amount of the device, after the offset, that can be used
for storage of data. This will normally be the same as the
component_size. This can be written while assembling an
array. If a value less than the current component_size is
written, component_size will be reduced to this value.
An active md device will also contain and entry for each active device
in the array. These are named

135
Documentation/mutex-design.txt Normal file
Просмотреть файл

@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
Generic Mutex Subsystem
started by Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>
"Why on earth do we need a new mutex subsystem, and what's wrong
with semaphores?"
firstly, there's nothing wrong with semaphores. But if the simpler
mutex semantics are sufficient for your code, then there are a couple
of advantages of mutexes:
- 'struct mutex' is smaller on most architectures: .e.g on x86,
'struct semaphore' is 20 bytes, 'struct mutex' is 16 bytes.
A smaller structure size means less RAM footprint, and better
CPU-cache utilization.
- tighter code. On x86 i get the following .text sizes when
switching all mutex-alike semaphores in the kernel to the mutex
subsystem:
text data bss dec hex filename
3280380 868188 396860 4545428 455b94 vmlinux-semaphore
3255329 865296 396732 4517357 44eded vmlinux-mutex
that's 25051 bytes of code saved, or a 0.76% win - off the hottest
codepaths of the kernel. (The .data savings are 2892 bytes, or 0.33%)
Smaller code means better icache footprint, which is one of the
major optimization goals in the Linux kernel currently.
- the mutex subsystem is slightly faster and has better scalability for
contended workloads. On an 8-way x86 system, running a mutex-based
kernel and testing creat+unlink+close (of separate, per-task files)
in /tmp with 16 parallel tasks, the average number of ops/sec is:
Semaphores: Mutexes:
$ ./test-mutex V 16 10 $ ./test-mutex V 16 10
8 CPUs, running 16 tasks. 8 CPUs, running 16 tasks.
checking VFS performance. checking VFS performance.
avg loops/sec: 34713 avg loops/sec: 84153
CPU utilization: 63% CPU utilization: 22%
i.e. in this workload, the mutex based kernel was 2.4 times faster
than the semaphore based kernel, _and_ it also had 2.8 times less CPU
utilization. (In terms of 'ops per CPU cycle', the semaphore kernel
performed 551 ops/sec per 1% of CPU time used, while the mutex kernel
performed 3825 ops/sec per 1% of CPU time used - it was 6.9 times
more efficient.)
the scalability difference is visible even on a 2-way P4 HT box:
Semaphores: Mutexes:
$ ./test-mutex V 16 10 $ ./test-mutex V 16 10
4 CPUs, running 16 tasks. 8 CPUs, running 16 tasks.
checking VFS performance. checking VFS performance.
avg loops/sec: 127659 avg loops/sec: 181082
CPU utilization: 100% CPU utilization: 34%
(the straight performance advantage of mutexes is 41%, the per-cycle
efficiency of mutexes is 4.1 times better.)
- there are no fastpath tradeoffs, the mutex fastpath is just as tight
as the semaphore fastpath. On x86, the locking fastpath is 2
instructions:
c0377ccb <mutex_lock>:
c0377ccb: f0 ff 08 lock decl (%eax)
c0377cce: 78 0e js c0377cde <.text.lock.mutex>
c0377cd0: c3 ret
the unlocking fastpath is equally tight:
c0377cd1 <mutex_unlock>:
c0377cd1: f0 ff 00 lock incl (%eax)
c0377cd4: 7e 0f jle c0377ce5 <.text.lock.mutex+0x7>
c0377cd6: c3 ret
- 'struct mutex' semantics are well-defined and are enforced if
CONFIG_DEBUG_MUTEXES is turned on. Semaphores on the other hand have
virtually no debugging code or instrumentation. The mutex subsystem
checks and enforces the following rules:
* - only one task can hold the mutex at a time
* - only the owner can unlock the mutex
* - multiple unlocks are not permitted
* - recursive locking is not permitted
* - a mutex object must be initialized via the API
* - a mutex object must not be initialized via memset or copying
* - task may not exit with mutex held
* - memory areas where held locks reside must not be freed
* - held mutexes must not be reinitialized
* - mutexes may not be used in irq contexts
furthermore, there are also convenience features in the debugging
code:
* - uses symbolic names of mutexes, whenever they are printed in debug output
* - point-of-acquire tracking, symbolic lookup of function names
* - list of all locks held in the system, printout of them
* - owner tracking
* - detects self-recursing locks and prints out all relevant info
* - detects multi-task circular deadlocks and prints out all affected
* locks and tasks (and only those tasks)
Disadvantages
-------------
The stricter mutex API means you cannot use mutexes the same way you
can use semaphores: e.g. they cannot be used from an interrupt context,
nor can they be unlocked from a different context that which acquired
it. [ I'm not aware of any other (e.g. performance) disadvantages from
using mutexes at the moment, please let me know if you find any. ]
Implementation of mutexes
-------------------------
'struct mutex' is the new mutex type, defined in include/linux/mutex.h
and implemented in kernel/mutex.c. It is a counter-based mutex with a
spinlock and a wait-list. The counter has 3 states: 1 for "unlocked",
0 for "locked" and negative numbers (usually -1) for "locked, potential
waiters queued".
the APIs of 'struct mutex' have been streamlined:
DEFINE_MUTEX(name);
mutex_init(mutex);
void mutex_lock(struct mutex *lock);
int mutex_lock_interruptible(struct mutex *lock);
int mutex_trylock(struct mutex *lock);
void mutex_unlock(struct mutex *lock);
int mutex_is_locked(struct mutex *lock);

2
Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -945,7 +945,6 @@ bond0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:C0:F0:1F:37:B4
collisions:0 txqueuelen:0
eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:C0:F0:1F:37:B4
inet addr:XXX.XXX.XXX.YYY Bcast:XXX.XXX.XXX.255 Mask:255.255.252.0
UP BROADCAST RUNNING SLAVE MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:3573025 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:1643167 errors:1 dropped:0 overruns:1 carrier:0
@ -953,7 +952,6 @@ eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:C0:F0:1F:37:B4
Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1080
eth1 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:C0:F0:1F:37:B4
inet addr:XXX.XXX.XXX.YYY Bcast:XXX.XXX.XXX.255 Mask:255.255.252.0
UP BROADCAST RUNNING SLAVE MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:3651769 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:1643480 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0

72
Documentation/networking/gianfar.txt Normal file
Просмотреть файл

@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
The Gianfar Ethernet Driver
Sysfs File description
Author: Andy Fleming <afleming@freescale.com>
Updated: 2005-07-28
SYSFS
Several of the features of the gianfar driver are controlled
through sysfs files. These are:
bd_stash:
To stash RX Buffer Descriptors in the L2, echo 'on' or '1' to
bd_stash, echo 'off' or '0' to disable
rx_stash_len:
To stash the first n bytes of the packet in L2, echo the number
of bytes to buf_stash_len. echo 0 to disable.
WARNING: You could really screw these up if you set them too low or high!
fifo_threshold:
To change the number of bytes the controller needs in the
fifo before it starts transmission, echo the number of bytes to
fifo_thresh. Range should be 0-511.
fifo_starve:
When the FIFO has less than this many bytes during a transmit, it
enters starve mode, and increases the priority of TX memory
transactions. To change, echo the number of bytes to
fifo_starve. Range should be 0-511.
fifo_starve_off:
Once in starve mode, the FIFO remains there until it has this
many bytes. To change, echo the number of bytes to
fifo_starve_off. Range should be 0-511.
CHECKSUM OFFLOADING
The eTSEC controller (first included in parts from late 2005 like
the 8548) has the ability to perform TCP, UDP, and IP checksums
in hardware. The Linux kernel only offloads the TCP and UDP
checksums (and always performs the pseudo header checksums), so
the driver only supports checksumming for TCP/IP and UDP/IP
packets. Use ethtool to enable or disable this feature for RX
and TX.
VLAN
In order to use VLAN, please consult Linux documentation on
configuring VLANs. The gianfar driver supports hardware insertion and
extraction of VLAN headers, but not filtering. Filtering will be
done by the kernel.
MULTICASTING
The gianfar driver supports using the group hash table on the
TSEC (and the extended hash table on the eTSEC) for multicast
filtering. On the eTSEC, the exact-match MAC registers are used
before the hash tables. See Linux documentation on how to join
multicast groups.
PADDING
The gianfar driver supports padding received frames with 2 bytes
to align the IP header to a 16-byte boundary, when supported by
hardware.
ETHTOOL
The gianfar driver supports the use of ethtool for many
configuration options. You must run ethtool only on currently
open interfaces. See ethtool documentation for details.

23
Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -46,6 +46,29 @@ ipfrag_secret_interval - INTEGER
for the hash secret) for IP fragments.
Default: 600
ipfrag_max_dist - INTEGER
ipfrag_max_dist is a non-negative integer value which defines the
maximum "disorder" which is allowed among fragments which share a
common IP source address. Note that reordering of packets is
not unusual, but if a large number of fragments arrive from a source
IP address while a particular fragment queue remains incomplete, it
probably indicates that one or more fragments belonging to that queue
have been lost. When ipfrag_max_dist is positive, an additional check
is done on fragments before they are added to a reassembly queue - if
ipfrag_max_dist (or more) fragments have arrived from a particular IP
address between additions to any IP fragment queue using that source
address, it's presumed that one or more fragments in the queue are
lost. The existing fragment queue will be dropped, and a new one
started. An ipfrag_max_dist value of zero disables this check.
Using a very small value, e.g. 1 or 2, for ipfrag_max_dist can
result in unnecessarily dropping fragment queues when normal
reordering of packets occurs, which could lead to poor application
performance. Using a very large value, e.g. 50000, increases the
likelihood of incorrectly reassembling IP fragments that originate
from different IP datagrams, which could result in data corruption.
Default: 64
INET peer storage:
inet_peer_threshold - INTEGER

4
Documentation/networking/sk98lin.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ To use the driver as a module, proceed as follows:
with (M)
5. Execute the command "make modules".
6. Execute the command "make modules_install".
The appropiate modules will be installed.
The appropriate modules will be installed.
7. Reboot your system.
@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Default: Both
This parameters is only relevant if auto-negotiation for this port is
not set to "Sense". If auto-negotiation is set to "On", all three values
are possible. If it is set to "Off", only "Full" and "Half" are allowed.
This parameter is usefull if your link partner does not support all
This parameter is useful if your link partner does not support all
possible combinations.
Flow Control

8
Documentation/oops-tracing.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -41,11 +41,9 @@ the disk is not available then you have three options :-
run a null modem to a second machine and capture the output there
using your favourite communication program. Minicom works well.
(3) Patch the kernel with one of the crash dump patches. These save
data to a floppy disk or video rom or a swap partition. None of
these are standard kernel patches so you have to find and apply
them yourself. Search kernel archives for kmsgdump, lkcd and
oops+smram.
(3) Use Kdump (see Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt),
extract the kernel ring buffer from old memory with using dmesg
gdbmacro in Documentation/kdump/gdbmacros.txt.
Full Information

246
Documentation/pci-error-recovery.txt Normal file
Просмотреть файл

@ -0,0 +1,246 @@
PCI Error Recovery
------------------
May 31, 2005
Current document maintainer:
Linas Vepstas <linas@austin.ibm.com>
Some PCI bus controllers are able to detect certain "hard" PCI errors
on the bus, such as parity errors on the data and address busses, as
well as SERR and PERR errors. These chipsets are then able to disable
I/O to/from the affected device, so that, for example, a bad DMA
address doesn't end up corrupting system memory. These same chipsets
are also able to reset the affected PCI device, and return it to
working condition. This document describes a generic API form
performing error recovery.
The core idea is that after a PCI error has been detected, there must
be a way for the kernel to coordinate with all affected device drivers
so that the pci card can be made operational again, possibly after
performing a full electrical #RST of the PCI card. The API below
provides a generic API for device drivers to be notified of PCI
errors, and to be notified of, and respond to, a reset sequence.
Preliminary sketch of API, cut-n-pasted-n-modified email from
Ben Herrenschmidt, circa 5 april 2005
The error recovery API support is exposed to the driver in the form of
a structure of function pointers pointed to by a new field in struct
pci_driver. The absence of this pointer in pci_driver denotes an
"non-aware" driver, behaviour on these is platform dependant.
Platforms like ppc64 can try to simulate pci hotplug remove/add.
The definition of "pci_error_token" is not covered here. It is based on
Seto's work on the synchronous error detection. We still need to define
functions for extracting infos out of an opaque error token. This is
separate from this API.
This structure has the form:
struct pci_error_handlers
{
int (*error_detected)(struct pci_dev *dev, pci_error_token error);
int (*mmio_enabled)(struct pci_dev *dev);
int (*resume)(struct pci_dev *dev);
int (*link_reset)(struct pci_dev *dev);
int (*slot_reset)(struct pci_dev *dev);
};
A driver doesn't have to implement all of these callbacks. The
only mandatory one is error_detected(). If a callback is not
implemented, the corresponding feature is considered unsupported.
For example, if mmio_enabled() and resume() aren't there, then the
driver is assumed as not doing any direct recovery and requires
a reset. If link_reset() is not implemented, the card is assumed as
not caring about link resets, in which case, if recover is supported,
the core can try recover (but not slot_reset() unless it really did
reset the slot). If slot_reset() is not supported, link_reset() can
be called instead on a slot reset.
At first, the call will always be :
1) error_detected()
Error detected. This is sent once after an error has been detected. At
this point, the device might not be accessible anymore depending on the
platform (the slot will be isolated on ppc64). The driver may already
have "noticed" the error because of a failing IO, but this is the proper
"synchronisation point", that is, it gives a chance to the driver to
cleanup, waiting for pending stuff (timers, whatever, etc...) to
complete; it can take semaphores, schedule, etc... everything but touch
the device. Within this function and after it returns, the driver
shouldn't do any new IOs. Called in task context. This is sort of a
"quiesce" point. See note about interrupts at the end of this doc.
Result codes:
- PCIERR_RESULT_CAN_RECOVER:
Driever returns this if it thinks it might be able to recover
the HW by just banging IOs or if it wants to be given
a chance to extract some diagnostic informations (see
below).
- PCIERR_RESULT_NEED_RESET:
Driver returns this if it thinks it can't recover unless the
slot is reset.
- PCIERR_RESULT_DISCONNECT:
Return this if driver thinks it won't recover at all,
(this will detach the driver ? or just leave it
dangling ? to be decided)
So at this point, we have called error_detected() for all drivers
on the segment that had the error. On ppc64, the slot is isolated. What
happens now typically depends on the result from the drivers. If all
drivers on the segment/slot return PCIERR_RESULT_CAN_RECOVER, we would
re-enable IOs on the slot (or do nothing special if the platform doesn't
isolate slots) and call 2). If not and we can reset slots, we go to 4),
if neither, we have a dead slot. If it's an hotplug slot, we might
"simulate" reset by triggering HW unplug/replug though.
>>> Current ppc64 implementation assumes that a device driver will
>>> *not* schedule or semaphore in this routine; the current ppc64
>>> implementation uses one kernel thread to notify all devices;
>>> thus, of one device sleeps/schedules, all devices are affected.
>>> Doing better requires complex multi-threaded logic in the error
>>> recovery implementation (e.g. waiting for all notification threads
>>> to "join" before proceeding with recovery.) This seems excessively
>>> complex and not worth implementing.
>>> The current ppc64 implementation doesn't much care if the device
>>> attempts i/o at this point, or not. I/O's will fail, returning
>>> a value of 0xff on read, and writes will be dropped. If the device
>>> driver attempts more than 10K I/O's to a frozen adapter, it will
>>> assume that the device driver has gone into an infinite loop, and
>>> it will panic the the kernel.
2) mmio_enabled()
This is the "early recovery" call. IOs are allowed again, but DMA is
not (hrm... to be discussed, I prefer not), with some restrictions. This
is NOT a callback for the driver to start operations again, only to
peek/poke at the device, extract diagnostic information, if any, and
eventually do things like trigger a device local reset or some such,
but not restart operations. This is sent if all drivers on a segment
agree that they can try to recover and no automatic link reset was
performed by the HW. If the platform can't just re-enable IOs without
a slot reset or a link reset, it doesn't call this callback and goes
directly to 3) or 4). All IOs should be done _synchronously_ from
within this callback, errors triggered by them will be returned via
the normal pci_check_whatever() api, no new error_detected() callback
will be issued due to an error happening here. However, such an error
might cause IOs to be re-blocked for the whole segment, and thus
invalidate the recovery that other devices on the same segment might
have done, forcing the whole segment into one of the next states,
that is link reset or slot reset.
Result codes:
- PCIERR_RESULT_RECOVERED
Driver returns this if it thinks the device is fully
functionnal and thinks it is ready to start
normal driver operations again. There is no
guarantee that the driver will actually be
allowed to proceed, as another driver on the
same segment might have failed and thus triggered a
slot reset on platforms that support it.
- PCIERR_RESULT_NEED_RESET
Driver returns this if it thinks the device is not
recoverable in it's current state and it needs a slot
reset to proceed.
- PCIERR_RESULT_DISCONNECT
Same as above. Total failure, no recovery even after
reset driver dead. (To be defined more precisely)
>>> The current ppc64 implementation does not implement this callback.
3) link_reset()
This is called after the link has been reset. This is typically
a PCI Express specific state at this point and is done whenever a
non-fatal error has been detected that can be "solved" by resetting
the link. This call informs the driver of the reset and the driver
should check if the device appears to be in working condition.
This function acts a bit like 2) mmio_enabled(), in that the driver
is not supposed to restart normal driver I/O operations right away.
Instead, it should just "probe" the device to check it's recoverability
status. If all is right, then the core will call resume() once all
drivers have ack'd link_reset().
Result codes:
(identical to mmio_enabled)
>>> The current ppc64 implementation does not implement this callback.
4) slot_reset()
This is called after the slot has been soft or hard reset by the
platform. A soft reset consists of asserting the adapter #RST line
and then restoring the PCI BARs and PCI configuration header. If the
platform supports PCI hotplug, then it might instead perform a hard
reset by toggling power on the slot off/on. This call gives drivers
the chance to re-initialize the hardware (re-download firmware, etc.),
but drivers shouldn't restart normal I/O processing operations at
this point. (See note about interrupts; interrupts aren't guaranteed
to be delivered until the resume() callback has been called). If all
device drivers report success on this callback, the patform will call
resume() to complete the error handling and let the driver restart
normal I/O processing.
A driver can still return a critical failure for this function if
it can't get the device operational after reset. If the platform
previously tried a soft reset, it migh now try a hard reset (power
cycle) and then call slot_reset() again. It the device still can't
be recovered, there is nothing more that can be done; the platform
will typically report a "permanent failure" in such a case. The
device will be considered "dead" in this case.
Result codes:
- PCIERR_RESULT_DISCONNECT
Same as above.
>>> The current ppc64 implementation does not try a power-cycle reset
>>> if the driver returned PCIERR_RESULT_DISCONNECT. However, it should.
5) resume()
This is called if all drivers on the segment have returned
PCIERR_RESULT_RECOVERED from one of the 3 prevous callbacks.
That basically tells the driver to restart activity, tht everything
is back and running. No result code is taken into account here. If
a new error happens, it will restart a new error handling process.
That's it. I think this covers all the possibilities. The way those
callbacks are called is platform policy. A platform with no slot reset
capability for example may want to just "ignore" drivers that can't
recover (disconnect them) and try to let other cards on the same segment
recover. Keep in mind that in most real life cases, though, there will
be only one driver per segment.
Now, there is a note about interrupts. If you get an interrupt and your
device is dead or has been isolated, there is a problem :)
After much thinking, I decided to leave that to the platform. That is,
the recovery API only precies that:
- There is no guarantee that interrupt delivery can proceed from any
device on the segment starting from the error detection and until the
restart callback is sent, at which point interrupts are expected to be
fully operational.
- There is no guarantee that interrupt delivery is stopped, that is, ad
river that gets an interrupts after detecting an error, or that detects
and error within the interrupt handler such that it prevents proper
ack'ing of the interrupt (and thus removal of the source) should just
return IRQ_NOTHANDLED. It's up to the platform to deal with taht
condition, typically by masking the irq source during the duration of
the error handling. It is expected that the platform "knows" which
interrupts are routed to error-management capable slots and can deal
with temporarily disabling that irq number during error processing (this
isn't terribly complex). That means some IRQ latency for other devices
sharing the interrupt, but there is simply no other way. High end
platforms aren't supposed to share interrupts between many devices
anyway :)
Revised: 31 May 2005 Linas Vepstas <linas@austin.ibm.com>

11
Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -1,5 +1,16 @@
This file details changes in 2.6 which affect PCMCIA card driver authors:
* Unify detach and REMOVAL event code, as well as attach and INSERTION
code (as of 2.6.16)
void (*remove) (struct pcmcia_device *dev);
int (*probe) (struct pcmcia_device *dev);
* Move suspend, resume and reset out of event handler (as of 2.6.16)
int (*suspend) (struct pcmcia_device *dev);
int (*resume) (struct pcmcia_device *dev);
should be initialized in struct pcmcia_driver, and handle
(SUSPEND == RESET_PHYSICAL) and (RESUME == CARD_RESET) events
* event handler initialization in struct pcmcia_driver (as of 2.6.13)
The event handler is notified of all events, and must be initialized
as the event() callback in the driver's struct pcmcia_driver.

2
Documentation/pm.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ proceed in the opposite direction.
Q: Who do I contact for additional information about
enabling power management for my specific driver/device?
ACPI Development mailing list: acpi-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
ACPI Development mailing list: linux-acpi@vger.kernel.org
System Interface -- OBSOLETE, DO NOT USE!
----------------*************************

11
Documentation/power/interface.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -41,3 +41,14 @@ to. Writing to this file will accept one of
It will only change to 'firmware' or 'platform' if the system supports
it.
/sys/power/image_size controls the size of the image created by
the suspend-to-disk mechanism. It can be written a string
representing a non-negative integer that will be used as an upper
limit of the image size, in megabytes. The suspend-to-disk mechanism will
do its best to ensure the image size will not exceed that number. However,
if this turns out to be impossible, it will try to suspend anyway using the
smallest image possible. In particular, if "0" is written to this file, the
suspend image will be as small as possible.
Reading from this file will display the current image size limit, which
is set to 500 MB by default.

9
Documentation/power/swsusp.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -27,6 +27,11 @@ echo shutdown > /sys/power/disk; echo disk > /sys/power/state
echo platform > /sys/power/disk; echo disk > /sys/power/state
If you want to limit the suspend image size to N megabytes, do
echo N > /sys/power/image_size
before suspend (it is limited to 500 MB by default).
Encrypted suspend image:
------------------------
@ -207,7 +212,7 @@ A: Try running
cat `cat /proc/[0-9]*/maps | grep / | sed 's:.* /:/:' | sort -u` > /dev/null
after resume. swapoff -a; swapon -a may also be usefull.
after resume. swapoff -a; swapon -a may also be useful.
Q: What happens to devices during swsusp? They seem to be resumed
during system suspend?
@ -318,7 +323,7 @@ to be useless to try to suspend to disk while that app is running?
A: No, it should work okay, as long as your app does not mlock()
it. Just prepare big enough swap partition.
Q: What information is usefull for debugging suspend-to-disk problems?
Q: What information is useful for debugging suspend-to-disk problems?
A: Well, last messages on the screen are always useful. If something
is broken, it is usually some kernel driver, therefore trying with as

10
Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX
Просмотреть файл

@ -8,12 +8,18 @@ please mail me.
cpu_features.txt
- info on how we support a variety of CPUs with minimal compile-time
options.
eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt
- info on PCI Bus EEH Error Recovery
hvcs.txt
- IBM "Hypervisor Virtual Console Server" Installation Guide
mpc52xx.txt
- Linux 2.6.x on MPC52xx family
ppc_htab.txt
- info about the Linux/PPC /proc/ppc_htab entry
smp.txt
- use and state info about Linux/PPC on MP machines
SBC8260_memory_mapping.txt
- EST SBC8260 board info
smp.txt
- use and state info about Linux/PPC on MP machines
sound.txt
- info on sound support under Linux/PPC
zImage_layout.txt

31
Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Current PPC64 Linux EEH Implementation
At this time, a generic EEH recovery mechanism has been implemented,
so that individual device drivers do not need to be modified to support
EEH recovery. This generic mechanism piggy-backs on the PCI hotplug
infrastructure, and percolates events up through the hotplug/udev
infrastructure, and percolates events up through the userspace/udev
infrastructure. Followiing is a detailed description of how this is
accomplished.
@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ A handler for the EEH notifier_block events is implemented in
drivers/pci/hotplug/pSeries_pci.c, called handle_eeh_events().
It saves the device BAR's and then calls rpaphp_unconfig_pci_adapter().
This last call causes the device driver for the card to be stopped,
which causes hotplug events to go out to user space. This triggers
which causes uevents to go out to user space. This triggers
user-space scripts that might issue commands such as "ifdown eth0"
for ethernet cards, and so on. This handler then sleeps for 5 seconds,
hoping to give the user-space scripts enough time to complete.
@ -258,29 +258,30 @@ rpa_php_unconfig_pci_adapter() { // in rpaphp_pci.c
calls
pci_destroy_dev (struct pci_dev *) {
calls
device_unregister (&dev->dev) { // in /drivers/base/core.c
device_unregister (&dev->dev) { // in /drivers/base/core.c
calls
device_del(struct device * dev) { // in /drivers/base/core.c
device_del(struct device * dev) { // in /drivers/base/core.c
calls
kobject_del() { //in /libs/kobject.c
kobject_del() { //in /libs/kobject.c
calls
kobject_hotplug() { // in /libs/kobject.c
kobject_uevent() { // in /libs/kobject.c
calls
kset_hotplug() { // in /lib/kobject.c
kset_uevent() { // in /lib/kobject.c
calls
kset->hotplug_ops->hotplug() which is really just
kset->uevent_ops->uevent() // which is really just
a call to
dev_hotplug() { // in /drivers/base/core.c
dev_uevent() { // in /drivers/base/core.c
calls
dev->bus->hotplug() which is really just a call to
pci_hotplug () { // in drivers/pci/hotplug.c
dev->bus->uevent() which is really just a call to
pci_uevent () { // in drivers/pci/hotplug.c
which prints device name, etc....
}
}
then kset_hotplug() calls
call_usermodehelper () with
argv[0]=hotplug_path[] which is "/sbin/hotplug"
--> event to userspace,
then kobject_uevent() sends a netlink uevent to userspace
--> userspace uevent
(during early boot, nobody listens to netlink events and
kobject_uevent() executes uevent_helper[], which runs the
event process /sbin/hotplug)
}
}
kobject_del() then calls sysfs_remove_dir(), which would

35
Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid
Просмотреть файл

@ -1,3 +1,38 @@
Release Date : Fri Nov 11 12:27:22 EST 2005 - Seokmann Ju <sju@lsil.com>
Current Version : 2.20.4.7 (scsi module), 2.20.2.6 (cmm module)
Older Version : 2.20.4.6 (scsi module), 2.20.2.6 (cmm module)
1. Sorted out PCI IDs to remove megaraid support overlaps.
Based on the patch from Daniel, sorted out PCI IDs along with
charactor node name change from 'megadev' to 'megadev_legacy' to avoid
conflict.
---
Hopefully we'll be getting the build restriction zapped much sooner,
but we should also be thinking about totally removing the hardware
support overlap in the megaraid drivers.
This patch pencils in a date of Feb 06 for this, and performs some
printk abuse in hope that existing legacy users might pick up on what's
going on.
Signed-off-by: Daniel Drake <dsd@gentoo.org>
---
2. Fixed a issue: megaraid always fails to reset handler.
---
I found that the megaraid driver always fails to reset the
adapter with the following message:
megaraid: resetting the host...
megaraid mbox: reset sequence completed successfully
megaraid: fast sync command timed out
megaraid: reservation reset failed
when the "Cluster mode" of the adapter BIOS is enabled.
So, whenever the reset occurs, the adapter goes to
offline and just become unavailable.
Jun'ichi Nomura [mailto:jnomura@mtc.biglobe.ne.jp]
---
Release Date : Mon Mar 07 12:27:22 EST 2005 - Seokmann Ju <sju@lsil.com>
Current Version : 2.20.4.6 (scsi module), 2.20.2.6 (cmm module)
Older Version : 2.20.4.5 (scsi module), 2.20.2.5 (cmm module)

108
Documentation/scsi/aacraid.txt Normal file
Просмотреть файл

@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
AACRAID Driver for Linux (take two)
Introduction
-------------------------
The aacraid driver adds support for Adaptec (http://www.adaptec.com)
RAID controllers. This is a major rewrite from the original
Adaptec supplied driver. It has signficantly cleaned up both the code
and the running binary size (the module is less than half the size of
the original).
Supported Cards/Chipsets
-------------------------
PCI ID (pci.ids) OEM Product
9005:0285:9005:028a Adaptec 2020ZCR (Skyhawk)
9005:0285:9005:028e Adaptec 2020SA (Skyhawk)
9005:0285:9005:028b Adaptec 2025ZCR (Terminator)
9005:0285:9005:028f Adaptec 2025SA (Terminator)
9005:0285:9005:0286 Adaptec 2120S (Crusader)
9005:0286:9005:028d Adaptec 2130S (Lancer)
9005:0285:9005:0285 Adaptec 2200S (Vulcan)
9005:0285:9005:0287 Adaptec 2200S (Vulcan-2m)
9005:0286:9005:028c Adaptec 2230S (Lancer)
9005:0286:9005:028c Adaptec 2230SLP (Lancer)
9005:0285:9005:0296 Adaptec 2240S (SabreExpress)
9005:0285:9005:0290 Adaptec 2410SA (Jaguar)
9005:0285:9005:0293 Adaptec 21610SA (Corsair-16)
9005:0285:103c:3227 Adaptec 2610SA (Bearcat)
9005:0285:9005:0292 Adaptec 2810SA (Corsair-8)
9005:0285:9005:0294 Adaptec Prowler
9005:0286:9005:029d Adaptec 2420SA (Intruder)
9005:0286:9005:029c Adaptec 2620SA (Intruder)
9005:0286:9005:029b Adaptec 2820SA (Intruder)
9005:0286:9005:02a7 Adaptec 2830SA (Skyray)
9005:0286:9005:02a8 Adaptec 2430SA (Skyray)
9005:0285:9005:0288 Adaptec 3230S (Harrier)
9005:0285:9005:0289 Adaptec 3240S (Tornado)
9005:0285:9005:0298 Adaptec 4000SAS (BlackBird)
9005:0285:9005:0297 Adaptec 4005SAS (AvonPark)
9005:0285:9005:0299 Adaptec 4800SAS (Marauder-X)
9005:0285:9005:029a Adaptec 4805SAS (Marauder-E)
9005:0286:9005:02a2 Adaptec 4810SAS (Hurricane)
1011:0046:9005:0364 Adaptec 5400S (Mustang)
1011:0046:9005:0365 Adaptec 5400S (Mustang)
9005:0283:9005:0283 Adaptec Catapult (3210S with arc firmware)
9005:0284:9005:0284 Adaptec Tomcat (3410S with arc firmware)
9005:0287:9005:0800 Adaptec Themisto (Jupiter)
9005:0200:9005:0200 Adaptec Themisto (Jupiter)
9005:0286:9005:0800 Adaptec Callisto (Jupiter)
1011:0046:9005:1364 Dell PERC 2/QC (Quad Channel, Mustang)
1028:0001:1028:0001 Dell PERC 2/Si (Iguana)
1028:0003:1028:0003 Dell PERC 3/Si (SlimFast)
1028:0002:1028:0002 Dell PERC 3/Di (Opal)
1028:0004:1028:0004 Dell PERC 3/DiF (Iguana)
1028:0002:1028:00d1 Dell PERC 3/DiV (Viper)
1028:0002:1028:00d9 Dell PERC 3/DiL (Lexus)
1028:000a:1028:0106 Dell PERC 3/DiJ (Jaguar)
1028:000a:1028:011b Dell PERC 3/DiD (Dagger)
1028:000a:1028:0121 Dell PERC 3/DiB (Boxster)
9005:0285:1028:0287 Dell PERC 320/DC (Vulcan)
9005:0285:1028:0291 Dell CERC 2 (DellCorsair)
1011:0046:103c:10c2 HP NetRAID-4M (Mustang)
9005:0285:17aa:0286 Legend S220 (Crusader)
9005:0285:17aa:0287 Legend S230 (Vulcan)
9005:0285:9005:0290 IBM ServeRAID 7t (Jaguar)
9005:0285:1014:02F2 IBM ServeRAID 8i (AvonPark)
9005:0285:1014:0312 IBM ServeRAID 8i (AvonParkLite)
9005:0286:1014:9580 IBM ServeRAID 8k/8k-l8 (Aurora)
9005:0286:1014:9540 IBM ServeRAID 8k/8k-l4 (AuroraLite)
9005:0286:9005:029f ICP ICP9014R0 (Lancer)
9005:0286:9005:029e ICP ICP9024R0 (Lancer)
9005:0286:9005:02a0 ICP ICP9047MA (Lancer)
9005:0286:9005:02a1 ICP ICP9087MA (Lancer)
9005:0286:9005:02a4 ICP ICP9085LI (Marauder-X)
9005:0286:9005:02a5 ICP ICP5085BR (Marauder-E)
9005:0286:9005:02a3 ICP ICP5085AU (Hurricane)
9005:0286:9005:02a6 ICP ICP9067MA (Intruder-6)
9005:0286:9005:02a9 ICP ICP5087AU (Skyray)
9005:0286:9005:02aa ICP ICP5047AU (Skyray)
People
-------------------------
Alan Cox <alan@redhat.com>
Christoph Hellwig <hch@infradead.org> (updates for new-style PCI probing and SCSI host registration,
small cleanups/fixes)
Matt Domsch <matt_domsch@dell.com> (revision ioctl, adapter messages)
Deanna Bonds (non-DASD support, PAE fibs and 64 bit, added new adaptec controllers
added new ioctls, changed scsi interface to use new error handler,
increased the number of fibs and outstanding commands to a container)
(fixed 64bit and 64G memory model, changed confusing naming convention
where fibs that go to the hardware are consistently called hw_fibs and
not just fibs like the name of the driver tracking structure)
Mark Salyzyn <Mark_Salyzyn@adaptec.com> Fixed panic issues and added some new product ids for upcoming hbas. Performance tuning, card failover and bug mitigations.
Original Driver
-------------------------
Adaptec Unix OEM Product Group
Mailing List
-------------------------
linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org (Interested parties troll here)
Also note this is very different to Brian's original driver
so don't expect him to support it.
Adaptec does support this driver. Contact Adaptec tech support or
aacraid@adaptec.com
Original by Brian Boerner February 2001
Rewritten by Alan Cox, November 2001

39
Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -150,7 +150,8 @@ scsi devices of which only the first 2 respond:
LLD mid level LLD
===-------------------=========--------------------===------
scsi_host_alloc() -->
scsi_add_host() --------+
scsi_add_host() ---->
scsi_scan_host() -------+
|
slave_alloc()
slave_configure() --> scsi_adjust_queue_depth()
@ -196,7 +197,7 @@ of the issues involved. See the section on reference counting below.
The hotplug concept may be extended to SCSI devices. Currently, when an
HBA is added, the scsi_add_host() function causes a scan for SCSI devices
HBA is added, the scsi_scan_host() function causes a scan for SCSI devices
attached to the HBA's SCSI transport. On newer SCSI transports the HBA
may become aware of a new SCSI device _after_ the scan has completed.
An LLD can use this sequence to make the mid level aware of a SCSI device:
@ -372,7 +373,7 @@ names all start with "scsi_".
Summary:
scsi_activate_tcq - turn on tag command queueing
scsi_add_device - creates new scsi device (lu) instance
scsi_add_host - perform sysfs registration and SCSI bus scan.
scsi_add_host - perform sysfs registration and set up transport class
scsi_adjust_queue_depth - change the queue depth on a SCSI device
scsi_assign_lock - replace default host_lock with given lock
scsi_bios_ptable - return copy of block device's partition table
@ -386,6 +387,7 @@ Summary:
scsi_remove_device - detach and remove a SCSI device
scsi_remove_host - detach and remove all SCSI devices owned by host
scsi_report_bus_reset - report scsi _bus_ reset observed
scsi_scan_host - scan SCSI bus
scsi_track_queue_full - track successive QUEUE_FULL events
scsi_unblock_requests - allow further commands to be queued to given host
scsi_unregister - [calls scsi_host_put()]
@ -425,10 +427,10 @@ void scsi_activate_tcq(struct scsi_device *sdev, int depth)
* Might block: yes
*
* Notes: This call is usually performed internally during a scsi
* bus scan when an HBA is added (i.e. scsi_add_host()). So it
* bus scan when an HBA is added (i.e. scsi_scan_host()). So it
* should only be called if the HBA becomes aware of a new scsi
* device (lu) after scsi_add_host() has completed. If successful
* this call we lead to slave_alloc() and slave_configure() callbacks
* device (lu) after scsi_scan_host() has completed. If successful
* this call can lead to slave_alloc() and slave_configure() callbacks
* into the LLD.
*
* Defined in: drivers/scsi/scsi_scan.c
@ -439,7 +441,7 @@ struct scsi_device * scsi_add_device(struct Scsi_Host *shost,
/**
* scsi_add_host - perform sysfs registration and SCSI bus scan.
* scsi_add_host - perform sysfs registration and set up transport class
* @shost: pointer to scsi host instance
* @dev: pointer to struct device of type scsi class
*
@ -448,7 +450,11 @@ struct scsi_device * scsi_add_device(struct Scsi_Host *shost,
* Might block: no
*
* Notes: Only required in "hotplug initialization model" after a
* successful call to scsi_host_alloc().
* successful call to scsi_host_alloc(). This function does not
* scan the bus; this can be done by calling scsi_scan_host() or
* in some other transport-specific way. The LLD must set up
* the transport template before calling this function and may only
* access the transport class data after this function has been called.
*
* Defined in: drivers/scsi/hosts.c
**/
@ -559,7 +565,7 @@ void scsi_deactivate_tcq(struct scsi_device *sdev, int depth)
* area for the LLD's exclusive use.
* Both associated refcounting objects have their refcount set to 1.
* Full registration (in sysfs) and a bus scan are performed later when
* scsi_add_host() is called.
* scsi_add_host() and scsi_scan_host() are called.
*
* Defined in: drivers/scsi/hosts.c .
**/
@ -698,6 +704,19 @@ int scsi_remove_host(struct Scsi_Host *shost)
void scsi_report_bus_reset(struct Scsi_Host * shost, int channel)
/**
* scsi_scan_host - scan SCSI bus
* @shost: a pointer to a scsi host instance
*
* Might block: yes
*
* Notes: Should be called after scsi_add_host()
*
* Defined in: drivers/scsi/scsi_scan.c
**/
void scsi_scan_host(struct Scsi_Host *shost)
/**
* scsi_track_queue_full - track successive QUEUE_FULL events on given
* device to determine if and when there is a need
@ -1433,7 +1452,7 @@ The following people have contributed to this document:
Christoph Hellwig <hch at infradead dot org>
Doug Ledford <dledford at redhat dot com>
Andries Brouwer <Andries dot Brouwer at cwi dot nl>
Randy Dunlap <rddunlap at osdl dot org>
Randy Dunlap <rdunlap at xenotime dot net>
Alan Stern <stern at rowland dot harvard dot edu>

194
Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
Each of top level sound card module takes the following options.
index - index (slot #) of sound card
- Values: 0 through 7 or negative
- Values: 0 through 31 or negative
- If nonnegative, assign that index number
- if negative, interpret as a bitmask of permissible
indices; the first free permitted index is assigned
@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
dma2 - second DMA # for AD1816A chip (PnP setup)
clockfreq - Clock frequency for AD1816A chip (default = 0, 33000Hz)
Module supports up to 8 cards, autoprobe and PnP.
This module supports multiple cards, autoprobe and PnP.
Module snd-ad1848
-----------------
@ -145,9 +145,11 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
irq - IRQ # for AD1848 chip
dma1 - DMA # for AD1848 chip (0,1,3)
Module supports up to 8 cards. This module does not support autoprobe
This module supports multiple cards. It does not support autoprobe
thus main port must be specified!!! Other ports are optional.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-ad1889
-----------------
@ -156,7 +158,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
ac97_quirk - AC'97 workaround for strange hardware
See the description of intel8x0 module for details.
This module supports up to 8 cards.
This module supports multiple cards.
Module snd-ali5451
------------------
@ -184,7 +186,9 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
mpu_irq - IRQ # for MPU-401 (PnP setup)
fm_port - port # for OPL3 FM (PnP setup)
Module supports up to 8 cards, autoprobe and PnP.
This module supports multiple cards, autoprobe and PnP.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-als4000
------------------
@ -194,7 +198,9 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
joystick_port - port # for legacy joystick support.
0 = disabled (default), 1 = auto-detect
Module supports up to 8 cards, autoprobe and PnP.
This module supports multiple cards, autoprobe and PnP.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-atiixp
-----------------
@ -213,6 +219,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
implementation depends on the motherboard, and you'll need to
choose the correct one via spdif_aclink module option.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-atiixp-modem
-----------------------
@ -223,6 +231,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
Note: The default index value of this module is -2, i.e. the first
slot is excluded.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-au8810, snd-au8820, snd-au8830
-----------------------------------------
@ -263,8 +273,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
dma1 - 1st DMA # for AZT2320 (WSS) chip (PnP setup)
dma2 - 2nd DMA # for AZT2320 (WSS) chip (PnP setup)
Module supports up to 8 cards, PnP and autoprobe.
This module supports multiple cards, PnP and autoprobe.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-azt3328
------------------
@ -272,7 +284,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
joystick - Enable joystick (default off)
Module supports up to 8 cards.
This module supports multiple cards.
Module snd-bt87x
----------------
@ -282,7 +294,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
digital_rate - Override the default digital rate (Hz)
load_all - Load the driver even if the card model isn't known
Module supports up to 8 cards.
This module supports multiple cards.
Note: The default index value of this module is -2, i.e. the first
slot is excluded.
@ -292,7 +304,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
Module for Creative Audigy LS and SB Live 24bit
Module supports up to 8 cards.
This module supports multiple cards.
Module snd-cmi8330
@ -308,7 +320,9 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
sbdma8 - 8bit DMA # for CMI8330 chip (SB16)
sbdma16 - 16bit DMA # for CMI8330 chip (SB16)
Module supports up to 8 cards and autoprobe.
This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-cmipci
-----------------
@ -321,8 +335,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
(default = 1)
joystick_port - Joystick port address (0 = disable, 1 = auto-detect)
Module supports autoprobe and multiple chips (max 8).
This module supports autoprobe and multiple cards.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-cs4231
-----------------
@ -335,7 +351,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
dma1 - first DMA # for CS4231 chip
dma2 - second DMA # for CS4231 chip
Module supports up to 8 cards. This module does not support autoprobe
This module supports multiple cards. This module does not support autoprobe
thus main port must be specified!!! Other ports are optional.
The power-management is supported.
@ -355,7 +371,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
dma2 - second DMA # for Yamaha CS4232 chip (0,1,3), -1 = disable
isapnp - ISA PnP detection - 0 = disable, 1 = enable (default)
Module supports up to 8 cards. This module does not support autoprobe
This module supports multiple cards. This module does not support autoprobe
thus main port must be specified!!! Other ports are optional.
The power-management is supported.
@ -376,7 +392,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
dma2 - second DMA # for CS4236 chip (0,1,3), -1 = disable
isapnp - ISA PnP detection - 0 = disable, 1 = enable (default)
Module supports up to 8 cards. This module does not support autoprobe
This module supports multiple cards. This module does not support autoprobe
(if ISA PnP is not used) thus main port and control port must be
specified!!! Other ports are optional.
@ -389,7 +405,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
dual_codec - Secondary codec ID (0 = disable, default)
Module supports up to 8 cards.
This module supports multiple cards.
The power-management is supported.
@ -403,13 +419,20 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
thinkpad - Force to enable Thinkpad's CLKRUN control.
mmap_valid - Support OSS mmap mode (default = 0).
Module supports up to 8 cards and autoprobe.
This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe.
Usually external amp and CLKRUN controls are detected automatically
from PCI sub vendor/device ids. If they don't work, give the options
above explicitly.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-cs5535audio
----------------------
Module for multifunction CS5535 companion PCI device
This module supports multiple cards.
Module snd-dt019x
-----------------
@ -423,9 +446,11 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
mpu_irq - IRQ # for MPU-401 (PnP setup)
dma8 - DMA # (PnP setup)
Module supports up to 8 cards. This module is enabled only with
This module supports multiple cards. This module is enabled only with
ISA PnP support.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-dummy
----------------
@ -433,6 +458,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
or input, but you may use this module for any application which
requires a sound card (like RealPlayer).
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-emu10k1
------------------
@ -450,7 +477,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
given in MB unit. Default value is 128.
enable_ir - enable IR
Module supports up to 8 cards and autoprobe.
This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe.
Input & Output configurations [extin/extout]
* Creative Card wo/Digital out [0x0003/0x1f03]
@ -466,12 +493,14 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
* Creative Card 5.1 (c) 2003 [0x3fc3/0x7cff]
* Creative Card all ins and outs [0x3fff/0x7fff]
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-emu10k1x
-------------------
Module for Creative Emu10k1X (SB Live Dell OEM version)
Module supports up to 8 cards.
This module supports multiple cards.
Module snd-ens1370
------------------
@ -482,7 +511,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
joystick - Enable joystick (default off)
Module supports up to 8 cards and autoprobe.
This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe.
Module snd-ens1371
------------------
@ -495,7 +524,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
joystick_port - port # for joystick (0x200,0x208,0x210,0x218),
0 = disable (default), 1 = auto-detect
Module supports up to 8 cards and autoprobe.
This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe.
Module snd-es968
----------------
@ -506,8 +535,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
irq - IRQ # for ES968 (SB8) chip (PnP setup)
dma1 - DMA # for ES968 (SB8) chip (PnP setup)
Module supports up to 8 cards, PnP and autoprobe.
This module supports multiple cards, PnP and autoprobe.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-es1688
-----------------
@ -519,7 +550,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
mpu_irq - IRQ # for MPU-401 port (5,7,9,10)
dma8 - DMA # for ES-1688 chip (0,1,3)
Module supports up to 8 cards and autoprobe (without MPU-401 port).
This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe (without MPU-401 port).
Module snd-es18xx
-----------------
@ -534,8 +565,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
dma2 - first DMA # for ES-18xx chip (0,1,3)
isapnp - ISA PnP detection - 0 = disable, 1 = enable (default)
Module supports up to 8 cards ISA PnP and autoprobe (without MPU-401 port
if native ISA PnP routines are not used).
This module supports multiple cards, ISA PnP and autoprobe (without MPU-401
port if native ISA PnP routines are not used).
When dma2 is equal with dma1, the driver works as half-duplex.
The power-management is supported.
@ -545,7 +576,9 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
Module for sound cards based on ESS Solo-1 (ES1938,ES1946) chips.
Module supports up to 8 cards and autoprobe.
This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-es1968
-----------------
@ -561,7 +594,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
enable_mpu - enable MPU401 (0 = off, 1 = on, 2 = auto (default))
joystick - enable joystick (default off)
Module supports up to 8 cards and autoprobe.
This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe.
The power-management is supported.
@ -577,8 +610,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
- High 16-bits are video (radio) device number + 1
- example: 0x10002 (MediaForte 256-PCPR, device 1)
Module supports up to 8 cards and autoprobe.
This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-gusclassic
---------------------
@ -592,7 +627,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
voices - GF1 voices limit (14-32)
pcm_voices - reserved PCM voices
Module supports up to 8 cards and autoprobe.
This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe.
Module snd-gusextreme
---------------------
@ -611,7 +646,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
voices - GF1 voices limit (14-32)
pcm_voices - reserved PCM voices
Module supports up to 8 cards and autoprobe (without MPU-401 port).
This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe (without MPU-401 port).
Module snd-gusmax
-----------------
@ -626,7 +661,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
voices - GF1 voices limit (14-32)
pcm_voices - reserved PCM voices
Module supports up to 8 cards and autoprobe.
This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe.
Module snd-hda-intel
--------------------
@ -688,12 +723,14 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
(Usually SD_LPLIB register is more accurate than the
position buffer.)
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-hdsp
---------------
Module for RME Hammerfall DSP audio interface(s)
Module supports up to 8 cards.
This module supports multiple cards.
Note: The firmware data can be automatically loaded via hotplug
when CONFIG_FW_LOADER is set. Otherwise, you need to load
@ -751,7 +788,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
cs8427_timeout - reset timeout for the CS8427 chip (S/PDIF transciever)
in msec resolution, default value is 500 (0.5 sec)
Module supports up to 8 cards and autoprobe. Note: The consumer part
This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe. Note: The consumer part
is not used with all Envy24 based cards (for example in the MidiMan Delta
serie).
@ -787,7 +824,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
aureon71, universe, k8x800, phase22, phase28, ms300,
av710
Module supports up to 8 cards and autoprobe.
This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe.
Note: The supported board is detected by reading EEPROM or PCI
SSID (if EEPROM isn't available). You can override the
@ -839,6 +876,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
Note: The default index value of this module is -2, i.e. the first
slot is excluded.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-interwave
--------------------
@ -855,7 +894,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
effect - 1 = InterWave effects enable (default 0);
requires 8 voices
Module supports up to 8 cards, autoprobe and ISA PnP.
This module supports multiple cards, autoprobe and ISA PnP.
Module snd-interwave-stb
------------------------
@ -875,14 +914,14 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
effect - 1 = InterWave effects enable (default 0);
requires 8 voices
Module supports up to 8 cards, autoprobe and ISA PnP.
This module supports multiple cards, autoprobe and ISA PnP.
Module snd-korg1212
-------------------
Module for Korg 1212 IO PCI card
Module supports up to 8 cards.
This module supports multiple cards.
Module snd-maestro3
-------------------
@ -894,7 +933,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
-1 for default pin (8 for allegro, 1 for
others)
Module supports autoprobe and multiple chips (max 8).
This module supports autoprobe and multiple chips.
Note: the binding of amplifier is dependent on hardware.
If there is no sound even though all channels are unmuted, try to
@ -909,7 +948,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
Module for Digigram miXart8 sound cards.
Module supports multiple cards.
This module supports multiple cards.
Note: One miXart8 board will be represented as 4 alsa cards.
See MIXART.txt for details.
@ -928,7 +967,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
irq - IRQ number or -1 (disable)
pnp - PnP detection - 0 = disable, 1 = enable (default)
Module supports multiple devices (max 8) and PnP.
This module supports multiple devices and PnP.
Module snd-mtpav
----------------
@ -1014,7 +1053,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
dma2 - second DMA # for Yamaha OPL3-SA chip (0,1,3), -1 = disable
isapnp - ISA PnP detection - 0 = disable, 1 = enable (default)
Module supports up to 8 cards and ISA PnP. This module does not support
This module supports multiple cards and ISA PnP. It does not support
autoprobe (if ISA PnP is not used) thus all ports must be specified!!!
The power-management is supported.
@ -1064,6 +1103,13 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
This module supports only one card, autoprobe and PnP.
Module snd-pcxhr
----------------
Module for Digigram PCXHR boards
This module supports multiple cards.
Module snd-powermac (on ppc only)
---------------------------------
@ -1084,20 +1130,22 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
For ARM architecture only.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-rme32
----------------
Module for RME Digi32, Digi32 Pro and Digi32/8 (Sek'd Prodif32,
Prodif96 and Prodif Gold) sound cards.
Module supports up to 8 cards.
This module supports multiple cards.
Module snd-rme96
----------------
Module for RME Digi96, Digi96/8 and Digi96/8 PRO/PAD/PST sound cards.
Module supports up to 8 cards.
This module supports multiple cards.
Module snd-rme9652
------------------
@ -1107,7 +1155,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
precise_ptr - Enable precise pointer (doesn't work reliably).
(default = 0)
Module supports up to 8 cards.
This module supports multiple cards.
Note: snd-page-alloc module does the job which snd-hammerfall-mem
module did formerly. It will allocate the buffers in advance
@ -1124,6 +1172,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
Module supports only one card.
Module has no enable and index options.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-sb8
--------------
@ -1135,8 +1185,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
irq - IRQ # for SB DSP chip (5,7,9,10)
dma8 - DMA # for SB DSP chip (1,3)
Module supports up to 8 cards and autoprobe.
This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-sb16 and snd-sbawe
-----------------------------
@ -1155,7 +1207,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
csp - ASP/CSP chip support - 0 = disable (default), 1 = enable
isapnp - ISA PnP detection - 0 = disable, 1 = enable (default)
Module supports up to 8 cards, autoprobe and ISA PnP.
This module supports multiple cards, autoprobe and ISA PnP.
Note: To use Vibra16X cards in 16-bit half duplex mode, you must
disable 16bit DMA with dma16 = -1 module parameter.
@ -1163,6 +1215,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
half duplex mode through 8-bit DMA channel by disabling their
16-bit DMA channel.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-sgalaxy
------------------
@ -1173,7 +1227,9 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
irq - IRQ # (7,9,10,11)
dma1 - DMA #
Module supports up to 8 cards.
This module supports multiple cards.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-sscape
-----------------
@ -1185,7 +1241,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
mpu_irq - MPU-401 IRQ # (PnP setup)
dma - DMA # (PnP setup)
Module supports up to 8 cards. ISA PnP must be enabled.
This module supports multiple cards. ISA PnP must be enabled.
You need sscape_ctl tool in alsa-tools package for loading
the microcode.
@ -1194,21 +1250,21 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
Module for AMD7930 sound chips found on Sparcs.
Module supports up to 8 cards.
This module supports multiple cards.
Module snd-sun-cs4231 (on sparc only)
-------------------------------------
Module for CS4231 sound chips found on Sparcs.
Module supports up to 8 cards.
This module supports multiple cards.
Module snd-sun-dbri (on sparc only)
-----------------------------------
Module for DBRI sound chips found on Sparcs.
Module supports up to 8 cards.
This module supports multiple cards.
Module snd-wavefront
--------------------
@ -1228,7 +1284,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
dma2 - DMA2 # for CS4232 PCM interface.
isapnp - ISA PnP detection - 0 = disable, 1 = enable (default)
Module supports up to 8 cards and ISA PnP.
This module supports multiple cards and ISA PnP.
Module snd-sonicvibes
---------------------
@ -1240,7 +1296,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
- SoundCard must have onboard SRAM for this.
mge - Mic Gain Enable - 1 = enable, 0 = disable (default)
Module supports up to 8 cards and autoprobe.
This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe.
Module snd-serial-u16550
------------------------
@ -1259,7 +1315,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
0 = Soundcanvas, 1 = MS-124T, 2 = MS-124W S/A,
3 = MS-124W M/B, 4 = Generic
Module supports up to 8 cards. This module does not support autoprobe
This module supports multiple cards. This module does not support autoprobe
thus the main port must be specified!!! Other options are optional.
Module snd-trident
@ -1278,7 +1334,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
pcm_channels - max channels (voices) reserved for PCM
wavetable_size - max wavetable size in kB (4-?kb)
Module supports up to 8 cards and autoprobe.
This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe.
The power-management is supported.
@ -1290,14 +1346,14 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
vid - Vendor ID for the device (optional)
pid - Product ID for the device (optional)
This module supports up to 8 cards, autoprobe and hotplugging.
This module supports multiple devices, autoprobe and hotplugging.
Module snd-usb-usx2y
--------------------
Module for Tascam USB US-122, US-224 and US-428 devices.
This module supports up to 8 cards, autoprobe and hotplugging.
This module supports multiple devices, autoprobe and hotplugging.
Note: you need to load the firmware via usx2yloader utility included
in alsa-tools and alsa-firmware packages.
@ -1356,6 +1412,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
Note: for the MPU401 on VIA823x, use snd-mpu401 driver
additionally. The mpu_port option is for VIA686 chips only.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-via82xx-modem
------------------------
@ -1368,6 +1426,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
Note: The default index value of this module is -2, i.e. the first
slot is excluded.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-virmidi
------------------
@ -1375,9 +1435,9 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
This module creates virtual rawmidi devices which communicate
to the corresponding ALSA sequencer ports.
midi_devs - MIDI devices # (1-8, default=4)
midi_devs - MIDI devices # (1-4, default=4)
Module supports up to 8 cards.
This module supports multiple cards.
Module snd-vx222
----------------
@ -1387,7 +1447,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
mic - Enable Microphone on V222 Mic (NYI)
ibl - Capture IBL size. (default = 0, minimum size)
Module supports up to 8 cards.
This module supports multiple cards.
When the driver is compiled as a module and the hotplug firmware
is supported, the firmware data is loaded via hotplug automatically.
@ -1406,6 +1466,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
size is chosen. The possible IBL values can be found in
/proc/asound/cardX/vx-status proc file.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-vxpocket
-------------------
@ -1413,7 +1475,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
ibl - Capture IBL size. (default = 0, minimum size)
Module supports up to 8 cards. The module is compiled only when
This module supports multiple cards. The module is compiled only when
PCMCIA is supported on kernel.
With the older 2.6.x kernel, to activate the driver via the card
@ -1434,6 +1496,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
Note2: snd-vxp440 driver is merged to snd-vxpocket driver since
ALSA 1.0.10.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-ymfpci
-----------------
@ -1447,7 +1511,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
1 (auto-detect)
rear_switch - enable shared rear/line-in switch (bool)
Module supports autoprobe and multiple chips (max 8).
This module supports autoprobe and multiple chips.
The power-management is supported.
@ -1458,6 +1522,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
Note: the driver is build only when CONFIG_ISA is set.
The power-management is supported.
AC97 Quirk Option
=================
@ -1474,7 +1540,7 @@ the proper value with this option.
The following strings are accepted:
- default Don't override the default setting
- disable Disable the quirk
- none Disable the quirk
- hp_only Bind Master and Headphone controls as a single control
- swap_hp Swap headphone and master controls
- swap_surround Swap master and surround controls

592
Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl
Просмотреть файл

Разница между файлами не показана из-за своего большого размера Загрузить разницу

16
Documentation/sound/alsa/Procfile.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -138,6 +138,22 @@ card*/codec97#0/ac97#?-?+regs
# echo 02 9f1f > /proc/asound/card0/codec97#0/ac97#0-0+regs
USB Audio Streams
-----------------
card*/stream*
Shows the assignment and the current status of each audio stream
of the given card. This information is very useful for debugging.
HD-Audio Codecs
---------------
card*/codec#*
Shows the general codec information and the attribute of each
widget node.
Sequencer Information
---------------------

14
Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ The bus instance is created via snd_hda_bus_new(). You need to pass
the card instance, the template, and the pointer to store the
resultant bus instance.
int snd_hda_bus_new(snd_card_t *card, const struct hda_bus_template *temp,
int snd_hda_bus_new(struct snd_card *card, const struct hda_bus_template *temp,
struct hda_bus **busp);
It returns zero if successful. A negative return value means any
@ -166,14 +166,14 @@ The ops field contains the following callback functions:
struct hda_pcm_ops {
int (*open)(struct hda_pcm_stream *info, struct hda_codec *codec,
snd_pcm_substream_t *substream);
struct snd_pcm_substream *substream);
int (*close)(struct hda_pcm_stream *info, struct hda_codec *codec,
snd_pcm_substream_t *substream);
struct snd_pcm_substream *substream);
int (*prepare)(struct hda_pcm_stream *info, struct hda_codec *codec,
unsigned int stream_tag, unsigned int format,
snd_pcm_substream_t *substream);
struct snd_pcm_substream *substream);
int (*cleanup)(struct hda_pcm_stream *info, struct hda_codec *codec,
snd_pcm_substream_t *substream);
struct snd_pcm_substream *substream);
};
All are non-NULL, so you can call them safely without NULL check.
@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ parameter, and PCI subsystem IDs. If the matching entry is found, it
returns the config field value.
snd_hda_add_new_ctls() can be used to create and add control entries.
Pass the zero-terminated array of snd_kcontrol_new_t. The same array
Pass the zero-terminated array of struct snd_kcontrol_new. The same array
can be passed to snd_hda_resume_ctls() for resume.
Note that this will call control->put callback of these entries. So,
put callback should check codec->in_resume and force to restore the
@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ given value if it's non-zero even if the value is identical with the
cached value.
Macros HDA_CODEC_VOLUME(), HDA_CODEC_MUTE() and their variables can be
used for the entry of snd_kcontrol_new_t.
used for the entry of struct snd_kcontrol_new.
The input MUX helper callbacks for such a control are provided, too:
snd_hda_input_mux_info() and snd_hda_input_mux_put(). See

57
Documentation/spi/butterfly Normal file
Просмотреть файл

@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
spi_butterfly - parport-to-butterfly adapter driver
===================================================
This is a hardware and software project that includes building and using
a parallel port adapter cable, together with an "AVR Butterfly" to run
firmware for user interfacing and/or sensors. A Butterfly is a $US20
battery powered card with an AVR microcontroller and lots of goodies:
sensors, LCD, flash, toggle stick, and more. You can use AVR-GCC to
develop firmware for this, and flash it using this adapter cable.
You can make this adapter from an old printer cable and solder things
directly to the Butterfly. Or (if you have the parts and skills) you
can come up with something fancier, providing ciruit protection to the
Butterfly and the printer port, or with a better power supply than two
signal pins from the printer port.
The first cable connections will hook Linux up to one SPI bus, with the
AVR and a DataFlash chip; and to the AVR reset line. This is all you
need to reflash the firmware, and the pins are the standard Atmel "ISP"
connector pins (used also on non-Butterfly AVR boards).
Signal Butterfly Parport (DB-25)
------ --------- ---------------
SCK = J403.PB1/SCK = pin 2/D0
RESET = J403.nRST = pin 3/D1
VCC = J403.VCC_EXT = pin 8/D6
MOSI = J403.PB2/MOSI = pin 9/D7
MISO = J403.PB3/MISO = pin 11/S7,nBUSY
GND = J403.GND = pin 23/GND
Then to let Linux master that bus to talk to the DataFlash chip, you must
(a) flash new firmware that disables SPI (set PRR.2, and disable pullups
by clearing PORTB.[0-3]); (b) configure the mtd_dataflash driver; and
(c) cable in the chipselect.
Signal Butterfly Parport (DB-25)
------ --------- ---------------
VCC = J400.VCC_EXT = pin 7/D5
SELECT = J400.PB0/nSS = pin 17/C3,nSELECT
GND = J400.GND = pin 24/GND
The "USI" controller, using J405, can be used for a second SPI bus. That
would let you talk to the AVR over SPI, running firmware that makes it act
as an SPI slave, while letting either Linux or the AVR use the DataFlash.
There are plenty of spare parport pins to wire this one up, such as:
Signal Butterfly Parport (DB-25)
------ --------- ---------------
SCK = J403.PE4/USCK = pin 5/D3
MOSI = J403.PE5/DI = pin 6/D4
MISO = J403.PE6/DO = pin 12/S5,nPAPEROUT
GND = J403.GND = pin 22/GND
IRQ = J402.PF4 = pin 10/S6,ACK
GND = J402.GND(P2) = pin 25/GND

457
Documentation/spi/spi-summary Normal file
Просмотреть файл

@ -0,0 +1,457 @@
Overview of Linux kernel SPI support
====================================
02-Dec-2005
What is SPI?
------------
The "Serial Peripheral Interface" (SPI) is a synchronous four wire serial
link used to connect microcontrollers to sensors, memory, and peripherals.
The three signal wires hold a clock (SCLK, often on the order of 10 MHz),
and parallel data lines with "Master Out, Slave In" (MOSI) or "Master In,
Slave Out" (MISO) signals. (Other names are also used.) There are four
clocking modes through which data is exchanged; mode-0 and mode-3 are most
commonly used. Each clock cycle shifts data out and data in; the clock
doesn't cycle except when there is data to shift.
SPI masters may use a "chip select" line to activate a given SPI slave
device, so those three signal wires may be connected to several chips
in parallel. All SPI slaves support chipselects. Some devices have
other signals, often including an interrupt to the master.
Unlike serial busses like USB or SMBUS, even low level protocols for
SPI slave functions are usually not interoperable between vendors
(except for cases like SPI memory chips).
- SPI may be used for request/response style device protocols, as with
touchscreen sensors and memory chips.
- It may also be used to stream data in either direction (half duplex),
or both of them at the same time (full duplex).
- Some devices may use eight bit words. Others may different word
lengths, such as streams of 12-bit or 20-bit digital samples.
In the same way, SPI slaves will only rarely support any kind of automatic
discovery/enumeration protocol. The tree of slave devices accessible from
a given SPI master will normally be set up manually, with configuration
tables.
SPI is only one of the names used by such four-wire protocols, and
most controllers have no problem handling "MicroWire" (think of it as
half-duplex SPI, for request/response protocols), SSP ("Synchronous
Serial Protocol"), PSP ("Programmable Serial Protocol"), and other
related protocols.
Microcontrollers often support both master and slave sides of the SPI
protocol. This document (and Linux) currently only supports the master
side of SPI interactions.
Who uses it? On what kinds of systems?
---------------------------------------
Linux developers using SPI are probably writing device drivers for embedded
systems boards. SPI is used to control external chips, and it is also a
protocol supported by every MMC or SD memory card. (The older "DataFlash"
cards, predating MMC cards but using the same connectors and card shape,
support only SPI.) Some PC hardware uses SPI flash for BIOS code.
SPI slave chips range from digital/analog converters used for analog
sensors and codecs, to memory, to peripherals like USB controllers
or Ethernet adapters; and more.
Most systems using SPI will integrate a few devices on a mainboard.
Some provide SPI links on expansion connectors; in cases where no
dedicated SPI controller exists, GPIO pins can be used to create a
low speed "bitbanging" adapter. Very few systems will "hotplug" an SPI
controller; the reasons to use SPI focus on low cost and simple operation,
and if dynamic reconfiguration is important, USB will often be a more
appropriate low-pincount peripheral bus.
Many microcontrollers that can run Linux integrate one or more I/O
interfaces with SPI modes. Given SPI support, they could use MMC or SD
cards without needing a special purpose MMC/SD/SDIO controller.
How do these driver programming interfaces work?
------------------------------------------------
The <linux/spi/spi.h> header file includes kerneldoc, as does the
main source code, and you should certainly read that. This is just
an overview, so you get the big picture before the details.
SPI requests always go into I/O queues. Requests for a given SPI device
are always executed in FIFO order, and complete asynchronously through
completion callbacks. There are also some simple synchronous wrappers
for those calls, including ones for common transaction types like writing
a command and then reading its response.
There are two types of SPI driver, here called:
Controller drivers ... these are often built in to System-On-Chip
processors, and often support both Master and Slave roles.
These drivers touch hardware registers and may use DMA.
Or they can be PIO bitbangers, needing just GPIO pins.
Protocol drivers ... these pass messages through the controller
driver to communicate with a Slave or Master device on the
other side of an SPI link.
So for example one protocol driver might talk to the MTD layer to export
data to filesystems stored on SPI flash like DataFlash; and others might
control audio interfaces, present touchscreen sensors as input interfaces,
or monitor temperature and voltage levels during industrial processing.
And those might all be sharing the same controller driver.
A "struct spi_device" encapsulates the master-side interface between
those two types of driver. At this writing, Linux has no slave side
programming interface.
There is a minimal core of SPI programming interfaces, focussing on
using driver model to connect controller and protocol drivers using
device tables provided by board specific initialization code. SPI
shows up in sysfs in several locations:
/sys/devices/.../CTLR/spiB.C ... spi_device for on bus "B",
chipselect C, accessed through CTLR.
/sys/devices/.../CTLR/spiB.C/modalias ... identifies the driver
that should be used with this device (for hotplug/coldplug)
/sys/bus/spi/devices/spiB.C ... symlink to the physical
spiB-C device
/sys/bus/spi/drivers/D ... driver for one or more spi*.* devices
/sys/class/spi_master/spiB ... class device for the controller
managing bus "B". All the spiB.* devices share the same
physical SPI bus segment, with SCLK, MOSI, and MISO.
How does board-specific init code declare SPI devices?
------------------------------------------------------
Linux needs several kinds of information to properly configure SPI devices.
That information is normally provided by board-specific code, even for
chips that do support some of automated discovery/enumeration.
DECLARE CONTROLLERS
The first kind of information is a list of what SPI controllers exist.
For System-on-Chip (SOC) based boards, these will usually be platform
devices, and the controller may need some platform_data in order to
operate properly. The "struct platform_device" will include resources
like the physical address of the controller's first register and its IRQ.
Platforms will often abstract the "register SPI controller" operation,
maybe coupling it with code to initialize pin configurations, so that
the arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c files for several boards can all share the
same basic controller setup code. This is because most SOCs have several
SPI-capable controllers, and only the ones actually usable on a given
board should normally be set up and registered.
So for example arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c files might have code like:
#include <asm/arch/spi.h> /* for mysoc_spi_data */
/* if your mach-* infrastructure doesn't support kernels that can
* run on multiple boards, pdata wouldn't benefit from "__init".
*/
static struct mysoc_spi_data __init pdata = { ... };
static __init board_init(void)
{
...
/* this board only uses SPI controller #2 */
mysoc_register_spi(2, &pdata);
...
}
And SOC-specific utility code might look something like:
#include <asm/arch/spi.h>
static struct platform_device spi2 = { ... };
void mysoc_register_spi(unsigned n, struct mysoc_spi_data *pdata)
{
struct mysoc_spi_data *pdata2;
pdata2 = kmalloc(sizeof *pdata2, GFP_KERNEL);
*pdata2 = pdata;
...
if (n == 2) {
spi2->dev.platform_data = pdata2;
register_platform_device(&spi2);
/* also: set up pin modes so the spi2 signals are
* visible on the relevant pins ... bootloaders on
* production boards may already have done this, but
* developer boards will often need Linux to do it.
*/
}
...
}
Notice how the platform_data for boards may be different, even if the
same SOC controller is used. For example, on one board SPI might use
an external clock, where another derives the SPI clock from current
settings of some master clock.
DECLARE SLAVE DEVICES
The second kind of information is a list of what SPI slave devices exist
on the target board, often with some board-specific data needed for the
driver to work correctly.
Normally your arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c files would provide a small table
listing the SPI devices on each board. (This would typically be only a
small handful.) That might look like:
static struct ads7846_platform_data ads_info = {
.vref_delay_usecs = 100,
.x_plate_ohms = 580,
.y_plate_ohms = 410,
};
static struct spi_board_info spi_board_info[] __initdata = {
{
.modalias = "ads7846",
.platform_data = &ads_info,
.mode = SPI_MODE_0,
.irq = GPIO_IRQ(31),
.max_speed_hz = 120000 /* max sample rate at 3V */ * 16,
.bus_num = 1,
.chip_select = 0,
},
};
Again, notice how board-specific information is provided; each chip may need
several types. This example shows generic constraints like the fastest SPI
clock to allow (a function of board voltage in this case) or how an IRQ pin
is wired, plus chip-specific constraints like an important delay that's
changed by the capacitance at one pin.
(There's also "controller_data", information that may be useful to the
controller driver. An example would be peripheral-specific DMA tuning
data or chipselect callbacks. This is stored in spi_device later.)
The board_info should provide enough information to let the system work
without the chip's driver being loaded. The most troublesome aspect of
that is likely the SPI_CS_HIGH bit in the spi_device.mode field, since
sharing a bus with a device that interprets chipselect "backwards" is
not possible.
Then your board initialization code would register that table with the SPI
infrastructure, so that it's available later when the SPI master controller
driver is registered:
spi_register_board_info(spi_board_info, ARRAY_SIZE(spi_board_info));
Like with other static board-specific setup, you won't unregister those.
The widely used "card" style computers bundle memory, cpu, and little else
onto a card that's maybe just thirty square centimeters. On such systems,
your arch/.../mach-.../board-*.c file would primarily provide information
about the devices on the mainboard into which such a card is plugged. That
certainly includes SPI devices hooked up through the card connectors!
NON-STATIC CONFIGURATIONS
Developer boards often play by different rules than product boards, and one
example is the potential need to hotplug SPI devices and/or controllers.
For those cases you might need to use use spi_busnum_to_master() to look
up the spi bus master, and will likely need spi_new_device() to provide the
board info based on the board that was hotplugged. Of course, you'd later
call at least spi_unregister_device() when that board is removed.
When Linux includes support for MMC/SD/SDIO/DataFlash cards through SPI, those
configurations will also be dynamic. Fortunately, those devices all support
basic device identification probes, so that support should hotplug normally.
How do I write an "SPI Protocol Driver"?
----------------------------------------
All SPI drivers are currently kernel drivers. A userspace driver API
would just be another kernel driver, probably offering some lowlevel
access through aio_read(), aio_write(), and ioctl() calls and using the
standard userspace sysfs mechanisms to bind to a given SPI device.
SPI protocol drivers somewhat resemble platform device drivers:
static struct spi_driver CHIP_driver = {
.driver = {
.name = "CHIP",
.bus = &spi_bus_type,
.owner = THIS_MODULE,
},
.probe = CHIP_probe,
.remove = __devexit_p(CHIP_remove),
.suspend = CHIP_suspend,
.resume = CHIP_resume,
};
The driver core will autmatically attempt to bind this driver to any SPI
device whose board_info gave a modalias of "CHIP". Your probe() code
might look like this unless you're creating a class_device:
static int __devinit CHIP_probe(struct spi_device *spi)
{
struct CHIP *chip;
struct CHIP_platform_data *pdata;
/* assuming the driver requires board-specific data: */
pdata = &spi->dev.platform_data;
if (!pdata)
return -ENODEV;
/* get memory for driver's per-chip state */
chip = kzalloc(sizeof *chip, GFP_KERNEL);
if (!chip)
return -ENOMEM;
dev_set_drvdata(&spi->dev, chip);
... etc
return 0;
}
As soon as it enters probe(), the driver may issue I/O requests to
the SPI device using "struct spi_message". When remove() returns,
the driver guarantees that it won't submit any more such messages.
- An spi_message is a sequence of of protocol operations, executed
as one atomic sequence. SPI driver controls include:
+ when bidirectional reads and writes start ... by how its
sequence of spi_transfer requests is arranged;
+ optionally defining short delays after transfers ... using
the spi_transfer.delay_usecs setting;
+ whether the chipselect becomes inactive after a transfer and
any delay ... by using the spi_transfer.cs_change flag;
+ hinting whether the next message is likely to go to this same
device ... using the spi_transfer.cs_change flag on the last
transfer in that atomic group, and potentially saving costs
for chip deselect and select operations.
- Follow standard kernel rules, and provide DMA-safe buffers in
your messages. That way controller drivers using DMA aren't forced
to make extra copies unless the hardware requires it (e.g. working
around hardware errata that force the use of bounce buffering).
If standard dma_map_single() handling of these buffers is inappropriate,
you can use spi_message.is_dma_mapped to tell the controller driver
that you've already provided the relevant DMA addresses.
- The basic I/O primitive is spi_async(). Async requests may be
issued in any context (irq handler, task, etc) and completion
is reported using a callback provided with the message.
After any detected error, the chip is deselected and processing
of that spi_message is aborted.
- There are also synchronous wrappers like spi_sync(), and wrappers
like spi_read(), spi_write(), and spi_write_then_read(). These
may be issued only in contexts that may sleep, and they're all
clean (and small, and "optional") layers over spi_async().
- The spi_write_then_read() call, and convenience wrappers around
it, should only be used with small amounts of data where the
cost of an extra copy may be ignored. It's designed to support
common RPC-style requests, such as writing an eight bit command
and reading a sixteen bit response -- spi_w8r16() being one its
wrappers, doing exactly that.
Some drivers may need to modify spi_device characteristics like the
transfer mode, wordsize, or clock rate. This is done with spi_setup(),
which would normally be called from probe() before the first I/O is
done to the device.
While "spi_device" would be the bottom boundary of the driver, the
upper boundaries might include sysfs (especially for sensor readings),
the input layer, ALSA, networking, MTD, the character device framework,
or other Linux subsystems.
Note that there are two types of memory your driver must manage as part
of interacting with SPI devices.
- I/O buffers use the usual Linux rules, and must be DMA-safe.
You'd normally allocate them from the heap or free page pool.
Don't use the stack, or anything that's declared "static".
- The spi_message and spi_transfer metadata used to glue those
I/O buffers into a group of protocol transactions. These can
be allocated anywhere it's convenient, including as part of
other allocate-once driver data structures. Zero-init these.
If you like, spi_message_alloc() and spi_message_free() convenience
routines are available to allocate and zero-initialize an spi_message
with several transfers.
How do I write an "SPI Master Controller Driver"?
-------------------------------------------------
An SPI controller will probably be registered on the platform_bus; write
a driver to bind to the device, whichever bus is involved.
The main task of this type of driver is to provide an "spi_master".
Use spi_alloc_master() to allocate the master, and class_get_devdata()
to get the driver-private data allocated for that device.
struct spi_master *master;
struct CONTROLLER *c;
master = spi_alloc_master(dev, sizeof *c);
if (!master)
return -ENODEV;
c = class_get_devdata(&master->cdev);
The driver will initialize the fields of that spi_master, including the
bus number (maybe the same as the platform device ID) and three methods
used to interact with the SPI core and SPI protocol drivers. It will
also initialize its own internal state.
master->setup(struct spi_device *spi)
This sets up the device clock rate, SPI mode, and word sizes.
Drivers may change the defaults provided by board_info, and then
call spi_setup(spi) to invoke this routine. It may sleep.
master->transfer(struct spi_device *spi, struct spi_message *message)
This must not sleep. Its responsibility is arrange that the
transfer happens and its complete() callback is issued; the two
will normally happen later, after other transfers complete.
master->cleanup(struct spi_device *spi)
Your controller driver may use spi_device.controller_state to hold
state it dynamically associates with that device. If you do that,
be sure to provide the cleanup() method to free that state.
The bulk of the driver will be managing the I/O queue fed by transfer().
That queue could be purely conceptual. For example, a driver used only
for low-frequency sensor acess might be fine using synchronous PIO.
But the queue will probably be very real, using message->queue, PIO,
often DMA (especially if the root filesystem is in SPI flash), and
execution contexts like IRQ handlers, tasklets, or workqueues (such
as keventd). Your driver can be as fancy, or as simple, as you need.
THANKS TO
---------
Contributors to Linux-SPI discussions include (in alphabetical order,
by last name):
David Brownell
Russell King
Dmitry Pervushin
Stephen Street
Mark Underwood
Andrew Victor
Vitaly Wool

60
Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -1,58 +1,56 @@
Everything you ever wanted to know about Linux 2.6 -stable releases.
Rules on what kind of patches are accepted, and what ones are not, into
the "-stable" tree:
Rules on what kind of patches are accepted, and which ones are not, into the
"-stable" tree:
- It must be obviously correct and tested.
- It can not bigger than 100 lines, with context.
- It can not be bigger than 100 lines, with context.
- It must fix only one thing.
- It must fix a real bug that bothers people (not a, "This could be a
problem..." type thing.)
problem..." type thing).
- It must fix a problem that causes a build error (but not for things
marked CONFIG_BROKEN), an oops, a hang, data corruption, a real
security issue, or some "oh, that's not good" issue. In short,
something critical.
- No "theoretical race condition" issues, unless an explanation of how
the race can be exploited.
security issue, or some "oh, that's not good" issue. In short, something
critical.
- No "theoretical race condition" issues, unless an explanation of how the
race can be exploited is also provided.
- It can not contain any "trivial" fixes in it (spelling changes,
whitespace cleanups, etc.)
whitespace cleanups, etc).
- It must be accepted by the relevant subsystem maintainer.
- It must follow Documentation/SubmittingPatches rules.
- It must follow the Documentation/SubmittingPatches rules.
Procedure for submitting patches to the -stable tree:
- Send the patch, after verifying that it follows the above rules, to
stable@kernel.org.
- The sender will receive an ack when the patch has been accepted into
the queue, or a nak if the patch is rejected. This response might
take a few days, according to the developer's schedules.
- If accepted, the patch will be added to the -stable queue, for review
by other developers.
- The sender will receive an ACK when the patch has been accepted into the
queue, or a NAK if the patch is rejected. This response might take a few
days, according to the developer's schedules.
- If accepted, the patch will be added to the -stable queue, for review by
other developers.
- Security patches should not be sent to this alias, but instead to the
documented security@kernel.org.
documented security@kernel.org address.
Review cycle:
- When the -stable maintainers decide for a review cycle, the patches
will be sent to the review committee, and the maintainer of the
affected area of the patch (unless the submitter is the maintainer of
the area) and CC: to the linux-kernel mailing list.
- The review committee has 48 hours in which to ack or nak the patch.
- When the -stable maintainers decide for a review cycle, the patches will be
sent to the review committee, and the maintainer of the affected area of
the patch (unless the submitter is the maintainer of the area) and CC: to
the linux-kernel mailing list.
- The review committee has 48 hours in which to ACK or NAK the patch.
- If the patch is rejected by a member of the committee, or linux-kernel
members object to the patch, bringing up issues that the maintainers
and members did not realize, the patch will be dropped from the
queue.
- At the end of the review cycle, the acked patches will be added to
the latest -stable release, and a new -stable release will happen.
- Security patches will be accepted into the -stable tree directly from
the security kernel team, and not go through the normal review cycle.
members object to the patch, bringing up issues that the maintainers and
members did not realize, the patch will be dropped from the queue.
- At the end of the review cycle, the ACKed patches will be added to the
latest -stable release, and a new -stable release will happen.
- Security patches will be accepted into the -stable tree directly from the
security kernel team, and not go through the normal review cycle.
Contact the kernel security team for more details on this procedure.
Review committe:
- This will be made up of a number of kernel developers who have
volunteered for this task, and a few that haven't.
- This is made up of a number of kernel developers who have volunteered for
this task, and a few that haven't.

20
Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -26,12 +26,13 @@ Currently, these files are in /proc/sys/vm:
- min_free_kbytes
- laptop_mode
- block_dump
- drop-caches
==============================================================
dirty_ratio, dirty_background_ratio, dirty_expire_centisecs,
dirty_writeback_centisecs, vfs_cache_pressure, laptop_mode,
block_dump, swap_token_timeout:
block_dump, swap_token_timeout, drop-caches:
See Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
@ -102,3 +103,20 @@ This is used to force the Linux VM to keep a minimum number
of kilobytes free. The VM uses this number to compute a pages_min
value for each lowmem zone in the system. Each lowmem zone gets
a number of reserved free pages based proportionally on its size.
==============================================================
percpu_pagelist_fraction
This is the fraction of pages at most (high mark pcp->high) in each zone that
are allocated for each per cpu page list. The min value for this is 8. It
means that we don't allow more than 1/8th of pages in each zone to be
allocated in any single per_cpu_pagelist. This entry only changes the value
of hot per cpu pagelists. User can specify a number like 100 to allocate
1/100th of each zone to each per cpu page list.
The batch value of each per cpu pagelist is also updated as a result. It is
set to pcp->high/4. The upper limit of batch is (PAGE_SHIFT * 8)
The initial value is zero. Kernel does not use this value at boot time to set
the high water marks for each per cpu page list.

6
Documentation/sysrq.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -202,17 +202,13 @@ you must call __handle_sysrq_nolock instead.
* I have more questions, who can I ask?
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
You may feel free to send email to myrdraal@deathsdoor.com, and I will
respond as soon as possible.
-Myrdraal
And I'll answer any questions about the registration system you got, also
responding as soon as possible.
-Crutcher
* Credits
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Written by Mydraal <myrdraal@deathsdoor.com>
Written by Mydraal <vulpyne@vulpyne.net>
Updated by Adam Sulmicki <adam@cfar.umd.edu>
Updated by Jeremy M. Dolan <jmd@turbogeek.org> 2001/01/28 10:15:59
Added to by Crutcher Dunnavant <crutcher+kernel@datastacks.com>

2
Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv
Просмотреть файл

@ -141,3 +141,5 @@
140 -> Osprey 440 [0070:ff07]
141 -> Asound Skyeye PCTV
142 -> Sabrent TV-FM (bttv version)
143 -> Hauppauge ImpactVCB (bt878) [0070:13eb]
144 -> MagicTV

12
Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88
Просмотреть файл

@ -16,10 +16,10 @@
15 -> DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T1 [18ac:db00]
16 -> KWorld LTV883RF
17 -> DViCO FusionHDTV 3 Gold-Q [18ac:d810]
18 -> Hauppauge Nova-T DVB-T [0070:9002]
18 -> Hauppauge Nova-T DVB-T [0070:9002,0070:9001]
19 -> Conexant DVB-T reference design [14f1:0187]
20 -> Provideo PV259 [1540:2580]
21 -> DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Plus [18ac:db10]
21 -> DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Plus [18ac:db10,18ac:db11]
22 -> pcHDTV HD3000 HDTV [7063:3000]
23 -> digitalnow DNTV Live! DVB-T [17de:a8a6]
24 -> Hauppauge WinTV 28xxx (Roslyn) models [0070:2801]
@ -35,3 +35,11 @@
34 -> ATI HDTV Wonder [1002:a101]
35 -> WinFast DTV1000-T [107d:665f]
36 -> AVerTV 303 (M126) [1461:000a]
37 -> Hauppauge Nova-S-Plus DVB-S [0070:9201,0070:9202]
38 -> Hauppauge Nova-SE2 DVB-S [0070:9200]
39 -> KWorld DVB-S 100 [17de:08b2]
40 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1100 DVB-T/Hybrid [0070:9400,0070:9402]
41 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1100 DVB-T/Hybrid (Low Profile) [0070:9800,0070:9802]
42 -> digitalnow DNTV Live! DVB-T Pro [1822:0025]
43 -> KWorld/VStream XPert DVB-T with cx22702 [17de:08a1]
44 -> DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Dual Digital [18ac:db50]

5
Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
Просмотреть файл

@ -56,7 +56,7 @@
55 -> LifeView FlyDVB-T DUO [5168:0502,5168:0306]
56 -> Avermedia AVerTV 307 [1461:a70a]
57 -> Avermedia AVerTV GO 007 FM [1461:f31f]
58 -> ADS Tech Instant TV (saa7135) [1421:0350,1421:0370,1421:1370]
58 -> ADS Tech Instant TV (saa7135) [1421:0350,1421:0351,1421:0370,1421:1370]
59 -> Kworld/Tevion V-Stream Xpert TV PVR7134
60 -> Typhoon DVB-T Duo Digital/Analog Cardbus [4e42:0502]
61 -> Philips TOUGH DVB-T reference design [1131:2004]
@ -81,4 +81,5 @@
80 -> ASUS Digimatrix TV [1043:0210]
81 -> Philips Tiger reference design [1131:2018]
82 -> MSI TV@Anywhere plus [1462:6231]
83 -> Terratec Cinergy 250 PCI TV [153b:1160]
84 -> LifeView FlyDVB Trio [5168:0319]

7
Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner
Просмотреть файл

@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ tuner=38 - Philips PAL/SECAM multi (FM1216ME MK3)
tuner=39 - LG NTSC (newer TAPC series)
tuner=40 - HITACHI V7-J180AT
tuner=41 - Philips PAL_MK (FI1216 MK)
tuner=42 - Philips 1236D ATSC/NTSC daul in
tuner=42 - Philips 1236D ATSC/NTSC dual in
tuner=43 - Philips NTSC MK3 (FM1236MK3 or FM1236/F)
tuner=44 - Philips 4 in 1 (ATI TV Wonder Pro/Conexant)
tuner=45 - Microtune 4049 FM5
@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ tuner=48 - Tenna TNF 8831 BGFF)
tuner=49 - Microtune 4042 FI5 ATSC/NTSC dual in
tuner=50 - TCL 2002N
tuner=51 - Philips PAL/SECAM_D (FM 1256 I-H3)
tuner=52 - Thomson DDT 7610 (ATSC/NTSC)
tuner=52 - Thomson DTT 7610 (ATSC/NTSC)
tuner=53 - Philips FQ1286
tuner=54 - tda8290+75
tuner=55 - TCL 2002MB
@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ tuner=56 - Philips PAL/SECAM multi (FQ1216AME MK4)
tuner=57 - Philips FQ1236A MK4
tuner=58 - Ymec TVision TVF-8531MF/8831MF/8731MF
tuner=59 - Ymec TVision TVF-5533MF
tuner=60 - Thomson DDT 7611 (ATSC/NTSC)
tuner=60 - Thomson DTT 761X (ATSC/NTSC)
tuner=61 - Tena TNF9533-D/IF/TNF9533-B/DF
tuner=62 - Philips TEA5767HN FM Radio
tuner=63 - Philips FMD1216ME MK3 Hybrid Tuner
@ -68,3 +68,4 @@ tuner=66 - LG NTSC (TALN mini series)
tuner=67 - Philips TD1316 Hybrid Tuner
tuner=68 - Philips TUV1236D ATSC/NTSC dual in
tuner=69 - Tena TNF 5335 MF
tuner=70 - Samsung TCPN 2121P30A

4
Documentation/x86_64/boot-options.txt
Просмотреть файл

@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ SMP
cpumask=MASK only use cpus with bits set in mask
additional_cpus=NUM Allow NUM more CPUs for hotplug
(defaults are specified by the BIOS or half the available CPUs)
(defaults are specified by the BIOS, see Documentation/x86_64/cpu-hotplug-spec)
NUMA
@ -198,6 +198,6 @@ Debugging
Misc
noreplacement Don't replace instructions with more appropiate ones
noreplacement Don't replace instructions with more appropriate ones
for the CPU. This may be useful on asymmetric MP systems
where some CPU have less capabilities than the others.

21
Documentation/x86_64/cpu-hotplug-spec Normal file
Просмотреть файл

@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
Firmware support for CPU hotplug under Linux/x86-64
---------------------------------------------------
Linux/x86-64 supports CPU hotplug now. For various reasons Linux wants to
know in advance boot time the maximum number of CPUs that could be plugged
into the system. ACPI 3.0 currently has no official way to supply
this information from the firmware to the operating system.
In ACPI each CPU needs an LAPIC object in the MADT table (5.2.11.5 in the
ACPI 3.0 specification). ACPI already has the concept of disabled LAPIC
objects by setting the Enabled bit in the LAPIC object to zero.
For CPU hotplug Linux/x86-64 expects now that any possible future hotpluggable
CPU is already available in the MADT. If the CPU is not available yet
it should have its LAPIC Enabled bit set to 0. Linux will use the number
of disabled LAPICs to compute the maximum number of future CPUs.
In the worst case the user can overwrite this choice using a command line
option (additional_cpus=...), but it is recommended to supply the correct
number (or a reasonable approximation of it, with erring towards more not less)
in the MADT to avoid manual configuration.

5
Kbuild
Просмотреть файл

@ -22,8 +22,6 @@ sed-$(CONFIG_MIPS) := "/^@@@/s///p"
quiet_cmd_offsets = GEN $@
define cmd_offsets
mkdir -p $(dir $@); \
cat $< | \
(set -e; \
echo "#ifndef __ASM_OFFSETS_H__"; \
echo "#define __ASM_OFFSETS_H__"; \
@ -34,7 +32,7 @@ define cmd_offsets
echo " *"; \
echo " */"; \
echo ""; \
sed -ne $(sed-y); \
sed -ne $(sed-y) $<; \
echo ""; \
echo "#endif" ) > $@
endef
@ -45,5 +43,6 @@ arch/$(ARCH)/kernel/asm-offsets.s: arch/$(ARCH)/kernel/asm-offsets.c FORCE
$(call if_changed_dep,cc_s_c)
$(obj)/$(offsets-file): arch/$(ARCH)/kernel/asm-offsets.s Kbuild
$(Q)mkdir -p $(dir $@)
$(call cmd,offsets)

135
MAINTAINERS
Просмотреть файл

@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ S: Supported
ACPI
P: Len Brown
M: len.brown@intel.com
L: acpi-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
L: linux-acpi@vger.kernel.org
W: http://acpi.sourceforge.net/
T: git kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/lenb/linux-acpi-2.6.git
S: Maintained
@ -258,6 +258,13 @@ P: Ivan Kokshaysky
M: ink@jurassic.park.msu.ru
S: Maintained for 2.4; PCI support for 2.6.
AMD GEODE PROCESSOR/CHIPSET SUPPORT
P: Jordan Crouse
M: info-linux@geode.amd.com
L: info-linux@geode.amd.com
W: http://www.amd.com/us-en/ConnectivitySolutions/TechnicalResources/0,,50_2334_2452_11363,00.html
S: Supported
APM DRIVER
P: Stephen Rothwell
M: sfr@canb.auug.org.au
@ -539,21 +546,20 @@ W: http://linuxtv.org
T: git kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/mchehab/v4l-dvb.git
S: Maintained
BUSLOGIC SCSI DRIVER
P: Leonard N. Zubkoff
M: Leonard N. Zubkoff <lnz@dandelion.com>
L: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org
W: http://www.dandelion.com/Linux/
S: Maintained
COMMON INTERNET FILE SYSTEM (CIFS)
P: Steve French
M: sfrench@samba.org
L: linux-cifs-client@lists.samba.org
L: samba-technical@lists.samba.org
W: http://us1.samba.org/samba/Linux_CIFS_client.html
T: git kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/sfrench/cifs-2.6.git
S: Supported
CONFIGFS
P: Joel Becker
M: Joel Becker <joel.becker@oracle.com>
S: Supported
CIRRUS LOGIC GENERIC FBDEV DRIVER
P: Jeff Garzik
M: jgarzik@pobox.com
@ -650,6 +656,11 @@ L: linux-crypto@vger.kernel.org
T: git kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/herbert/crypto-2.6.git
S: Maintained
CS5535 Audio ALSA driver
P: Jaya Kumar
M: jayakumar.alsa@gmail.com
S: Maintained
CYBERPRO FB DRIVER
P: Russell King
M: rmk@arm.linux.org.uk
@ -679,13 +690,6 @@ M: pc300@cyclades.com
W: http://www.cyclades.com/
S: Supported
DAC960 RAID CONTROLLER DRIVER
P: Dave Olien
M dmo@osdl.org
W: http://www.osdl.org/archive/dmo/DAC960
L: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
S: Maintained
DAMA SLAVE for AX.25
P: Joerg Reuter
M: jreuter@yaina.de
@ -801,6 +805,7 @@ S: Maintained
DOCBOOK FOR DOCUMENTATION
P: Martin Waitz
M: tali@admingilde.org
T: git http://tali.admingilde.org/git/linux-docbook.git
S: Maintained
DOUBLETALK DRIVER
@ -917,7 +922,6 @@ S: Maintained
FARSYNC SYNCHRONOUS DRIVER
P: Kevin Curtis
M: kevin.curtis@farsite.co.uk
M: kevin.curtis@farsite.co.uk
W: http://www.farsite.co.uk/
S: Supported
@ -1225,7 +1229,7 @@ IEEE 1394 SUBSYSTEM
P: Ben Collins
M: bcollins@debian.org
P: Jody McIntyre
M: scjody@steamballoon.com
M: scjody@modernduck.com
L: linux1394-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
W: http://www.linux1394.org/
T: git kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/scjody/ieee1394.git
@ -1235,14 +1239,14 @@ IEEE 1394 OHCI DRIVER
P: Ben Collins
M: bcollins@debian.org
P: Jody McIntyre
M: scjody@steamballoon.com
M: scjody@modernduck.com
L: linux1394-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
W: http://www.linux1394.org/
S: Maintained
IEEE 1394 PCILYNX DRIVER
P: Jody McIntyre
M: scjody@steamballoon.com
M: scjody@modernduck.com
L: linux1394-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
W: http://www.linux1394.org/
S: Maintained
@ -1297,6 +1301,12 @@ M: ttb@tentacle.dhs.org and rml@novell.com
L: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
S: Maintained
INTEL FRAMEBUFFER DRIVER (excluding 810 and 815)
P: Sylvain Meyer
M: sylvain.meyer@worldonline.fr
L: linux-fbdev-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
S: Maintained
INTEL 810/815 FRAMEBUFFER DRIVER
P: Antonino Daplas
M: adaplas@pol.net
@ -1465,7 +1475,6 @@ P: Several
L: kernel-janitors@osdl.org
W: http://www.kerneljanitors.org/
W: http://sf.net/projects/kernel-janitor/
W: http://developer.osdl.org/rddunlap/kj-patches/
S: Maintained
KERNEL NFSD
@ -1476,17 +1485,11 @@ W: http://nfs.sourceforge.net/
W: http://www.cse.unsw.edu.au/~neilb/patches/linux-devel/
S: Maintained
KERNEL EVENT LAYER (KOBJECT_UEVENT)
P: Robert Love
M: rml@novell.com
L: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
S: Maintained
KEXEC
P: Eric Biederman
P: Randy Dunlap
M: ebiederm@xmission.com
M: rddunlap@osdl.org
M: rdunlap@xenotime.net
W: http://www.xmission.com/~ebiederm/files/kexec/
L: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
L: fastboot@osdl.org
@ -1695,7 +1698,6 @@ S: Maintained
MARVELL MV64340 ETHERNET DRIVER
P: Manish Lachwani
M: Manish_Lachwani@pmc-sierra.com
L: linux-mips@linux-mips.org
L: netdev@vger.kernel.org
S: Supported
@ -1894,11 +1896,20 @@ W: http://linux-ntfs.sf.net/
T: git kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/aia21/ntfs-2.6.git
S: Maintained
NVIDIA (RIVA) FRAMEBUFFER DRIVER
P: Ani Joshi
M: ajoshi@shell.unixbox.com
L: linux-nvidia@lists.surfsouth.com
S: Maintained
NVIDIA (rivafb and nvidiafb) FRAMEBUFFER DRIVER
P: Antonino Daplas
M: adaplas@pol.net
L: linux-fbdev-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
S: Maintained
ORACLE CLUSTER FILESYSTEM 2 (OCFS2)
P: Mark Fasheh
M: mark.fasheh@oracle.com
P: Kurt Hackel
M: kurt.hackel@oracle.com
L: ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com
W: http://oss.oracle.com/projects/ocfs2/
S: Supported
OLYMPIC NETWORK DRIVER
P: Peter De Shrijver
@ -1984,6 +1995,13 @@ M: hch@infradead.org
L: linux-abi-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
S: Maintained
PCI ERROR RECOVERY
P: Linas Vepstas
M: linas@austin.ibm.com
L: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
L: linux-pci@atrey.karlin.mff.cuni.cz
S: Supported
PCI SOUND DRIVERS (ES1370, ES1371 and SONICVIBES)
P: Thomas Sailer
M: sailer@ife.ee.ethz.ch
@ -2042,7 +2060,7 @@ S: Maintained
POSIX CLOCKS and TIMERS
P: George Anzinger
M: george@mvista.com
L: netdev@vger.kernel.org
L: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
S: Supported
POWERPC 4xx EMAC DRIVER
@ -2177,6 +2195,12 @@ L: rtl@rtlinux.org
W: www.rtlinux.org
S: Maintained
S3 SAVAGE FRAMEBUFFER DRIVER
P: Antonino Daplas
M: adaplas@pol.net
L: linux-fbdev-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
S: Maintained
S390
P: Martin Schwidefsky
M: schwidefsky@de.ibm.com
@ -2348,13 +2372,6 @@ P: Nicolas Pitre
M: nico@cam.org
S: Maintained
SNA NETWORK LAYER
P: Jay Schulist
M: jschlst@samba.org
L: linux-sna@turbolinux.com
W: http://www.linux-sna.org
S: Supported
SOFTWARE RAID (Multiple Disks) SUPPORT
P: Ingo Molnar
M: mingo@redhat.com
@ -2476,7 +2493,7 @@ P: Paul Mundt
M: lethal@linux-sh.org
P: Kazumoto Kojima
M: kkojima@rr.iij4u.or.jp
L: linux-sh@m17n.org
L: linuxsh-dev@lists.sourceforge.net
W: http://www.linux-sh.org
W: http://www.m17n.org/linux-sh/
W: http://www.rr.iij4u.or.jp/~kkojima/linux-sh4.html
@ -2515,6 +2532,19 @@ P: Romain Lievin
M: roms@lpg.ticalc.org
S: Maintained
TIPC NETWORK LAYER
P: Per Liden
M: per.liden@nospam.ericsson.com
P: Jon Maloy
M: jon.maloy@nospam.ericsson.com
P: Allan Stephens
M: allan.stephens@nospam.windriver.com
L: tipc-discussion@lists.sourceforge.net
W: http://tipc.sourceforge.net/
W: http://tipc.cslab.ericsson.net/
T: git tipc.cslab.ericsson.net:/pub/git/tipc.git
S: Maintained
TLAN NETWORK DRIVER
P: Samuel Chessman
M: chessman@tux.org
@ -2587,7 +2617,6 @@ S: Maintained
UDF FILESYSTEM
P: Ben Fennema
M: bfennema@falcon.csc.calpoly.edu
L: linux_udf@hpesjro.fc.hp.com
W: http://linux-udf.sourceforge.net
S: Maintained
@ -2640,6 +2669,12 @@ L: linux-usb-users@lists.sourceforge.net
L: linux-usb-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
S: Maintained
USB ISP116X DRIVER
P: Olav Kongas
M: ok@artecdesign.ee
L: linux-usb-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
S: Maintained
USB KAWASAKI LSI DRIVER
P: Oliver Neukum
M: oliver@neukum.name
@ -2651,7 +2686,7 @@ USB MASS STORAGE DRIVER
P: Matthew Dharm
M: mdharm-usb@one-eyed-alien.net
L: linux-usb-users@lists.sourceforge.net
L: linux-usb-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
L: usb-storage@lists.one-eyed-alien.net
S: Maintained
W: http://www.one-eyed-alien.net/~mdharm/linux-usb/
@ -2899,6 +2934,12 @@ W: http://linuxtv.org
T: git kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/mchehab/v4l-dvb.git
S: Maintained
VT8231 HARDWARE MONITOR DRIVER
P: Roger Lucas
M: roger@planbit.co.uk
L: lm-sensors@lm-sensors.org
S: Maintained
W1 DALLAS'S 1-WIRE BUS
P: Evgeniy Polyakov
M: johnpol@2ka.mipt.ru
@ -2925,6 +2966,12 @@ M: dm@sangoma.com
W: http://www.sangoma.com
S: Supported
WATCHDOG DEVICE DRIVERS
P: Wim Van Sebroeck
M: wim@iguana.be
T: git kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/wim/linux-2.6-watchdog.git
S: Maintained
WAVELAN NETWORK DRIVER & WIRELESS EXTENSIONS
P: Jean Tourrilhes
M: jt@hpl.hp.com

156
Makefile
Просмотреть файл

@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
VERSION = 2
PATCHLEVEL = 6
SUBLEVEL = 15
EXTRAVERSION =
SUBLEVEL = 16
EXTRAVERSION =-rc1
NAME=Sliding Snow Leopard
# *DOCUMENTATION*
@ -106,12 +106,13 @@ KBUILD_OUTPUT := $(shell cd $(KBUILD_OUTPUT) && /bin/pwd)
$(if $(KBUILD_OUTPUT),, \
$(error output directory "$(saved-output)" does not exist))
.PHONY: $(MAKECMDGOALS)
.PHONY: $(MAKECMDGOALS) cdbuilddir
$(MAKECMDGOALS) _all: cdbuilddir
$(filter-out _all,$(MAKECMDGOALS)) _all:
cdbuilddir:
$(if $(KBUILD_VERBOSE:1=),@)$(MAKE) -C $(KBUILD_OUTPUT) \
KBUILD_SRC=$(CURDIR) \
KBUILD_EXTMOD="$(KBUILD_EXTMOD)" -f $(CURDIR)/Makefile $@
KBUILD_EXTMOD="$(KBUILD_EXTMOD)" -f $(CURDIR)/Makefile $(MAKECMDGOALS)
# Leave processing to above invocation of make
skip-makefile := 1
@ -141,24 +142,6 @@ VPATH := $(srctree)
export srctree objtree VPATH TOPDIR
nullstring :=
space := $(nullstring) # end of line
# Take the contents of any files called localversion* and the config
# variable CONFIG_LOCALVERSION and append them to KERNELRELEASE. Be
# careful not to include files twice if building in the source
# directory. LOCALVERSION from the command line override all of this
localver := $(objtree)/localversion* $(srctree)/localversion*
localver := $(sort $(wildcard $(localver)))
# skip backup files (containing '~')
localver := $(foreach f, $(localver), $(if $(findstring ~, $(f)),,$(f)))
LOCALVERSION = $(subst $(space),, \
$(shell cat /dev/null $(localver)) \
$(patsubst "%",%,$(CONFIG_LOCALVERSION)))
KERNELRELEASE=$(VERSION).$(PATCHLEVEL).$(SUBLEVEL)$(EXTRAVERSION)$(LOCALVERSION)
# SUBARCH tells the usermode build what the underlying arch is. That is set
# first, and if a usermode build is happening, the "ARCH=um" on the command
@ -169,7 +152,7 @@ KERNELRELEASE=$(VERSION).$(PATCHLEVEL).$(SUBLEVEL)$(EXTRAVERSION)$(LOCALVERSION)
SUBARCH := $(shell uname -m | sed -e s/i.86/i386/ -e s/sun4u/sparc64/ \
-e s/arm.*/arm/ -e s/sa110/arm/ \
-e s/s390x/s390/ -e s/parisc64/parisc/ \
-e s/ppc64/powerpc/ )
-e s/ppc.*/powerpc/ )
# Cross compiling and selecting different set of gcc/bin-utils
# ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
@ -251,7 +234,7 @@ export KBUILD_CHECKSRC KBUILD_SRC KBUILD_EXTMOD
# If it is set to "silent_", nothing wil be printed at all, since
# the variable $(silent_cmd_cc_o_c) doesn't exist.
#
# A simple variant is to prefix commands with $(Q) - that's usefull
# A simple variant is to prefix commands with $(Q) - that's useful
# for commands that shall be hidden in non-verbose mode.
#
# $(Q)ln $@ :<
@ -280,16 +263,19 @@ export quiet Q KBUILD_VERBOSE
# cc support functions to be used (only) in arch/$(ARCH)/Makefile
# See documentation in Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt
# as-option
# Usage: cflags-y += $(call as-option, -Wa$(comma)-isa=foo,)
as-option = $(shell if $(CC) $(CFLAGS) $(1) -Wa,-Z -c -o /dev/null \
-xassembler /dev/null > /dev/null 2>&1; then echo "$(1)"; \
else echo "$(2)"; fi ;)
# cc-option
# Usage: cflags-y += $(call cc-option, -march=winchip-c6, -march=i586)
cc-option = $(shell if $(CC) $(CFLAGS) $(1) -S -o /dev/null -xc /dev/null \
> /dev/null 2>&1; then echo "$(1)"; else echo "$(2)"; fi ;)
# For backward compatibility
check_gcc = $(warning check_gcc is deprecated - use cc-option) \
$(call cc-option, $(1),$(2))
# cc-option-yn
# Usage: flag := $(call cc-option-yn, -march=winchip-c6)
cc-option-yn = $(shell if $(CC) $(CFLAGS) $(1) -S -o /dev/null -xc /dev/null \
@ -357,7 +343,11 @@ CFLAGS := -Wall -Wundef -Wstrict-prototypes -Wno-trigraphs \
-ffreestanding
AFLAGS := -D__ASSEMBLY__
export VERSION PATCHLEVEL SUBLEVEL EXTRAVERSION LOCALVERSION KERNELRELEASE \
# Read KERNELRELEASE from .kernelrelease (if it exists)
KERNELRELEASE = $(shell cat .kernelrelease 2> /dev/null)
KERNELVERSION = $(VERSION).$(PATCHLEVEL).$(SUBLEVEL)$(EXTRAVERSION)
export VERSION PATCHLEVEL SUBLEVEL KERNELRELEASE KERNELVERSION \
ARCH CONFIG_SHELL HOSTCC HOSTCFLAGS CROSS_COMPILE AS LD CC \
CPP AR NM STRIP OBJCOPY OBJDUMP MAKE AWK GENKSYMS PERL UTS_MACHINE \
HOSTCXX HOSTCXXFLAGS LDFLAGS_MODULE CHECK CHECKFLAGS
@ -452,6 +442,7 @@ export KBUILD_DEFCONFIG
config %config: scripts_basic outputmakefile FORCE
$(Q)mkdir -p include/linux
$(Q)$(MAKE) $(build)=scripts/kconfig $@
$(Q)$(MAKE) .kernelrelease
else
# ===========================================================================
@ -481,18 +472,20 @@ ifeq ($(dot-config),1)
# Read in dependencies to all Kconfig* files, make sure to run
# oldconfig if changes are detected.
-include .config.cmd
-include .kconfig.d
include .config
# If .config needs to be updated, it will be done via the dependency
# that autoconf has on .config.
# To avoid any implicit rule to kick in, define an empty command
.config: ;
.config .kconfig.d: ;
# If .config is newer than include/linux/autoconf.h, someone tinkered
# with it and forgot to run make oldconfig
include/linux/autoconf.h: .config
# with it and forgot to run make oldconfig.
# If kconfig.d is missing then we are probarly in a cleaned tree so
# we execute the config step to be sure to catch updated Kconfig files
include/linux/autoconf.h: .kconfig.d .config
$(Q)mkdir -p include/linux
$(Q)$(MAKE) -f $(srctree)/Makefile silentoldconfig
else
@ -553,33 +546,13 @@ export KBUILD_IMAGE ?= vmlinux
# images. Default is /boot, but you can set it to other values
export INSTALL_PATH ?= /boot
# If CONFIG_LOCALVERSION_AUTO is set, we automatically perform some tests
# and try to determine if the current source tree is a release tree, of any sort,
# or if is a pure development tree.
#
# A 'release tree' is any tree with a git TAG associated
# with it. The primary goal of this is to make it safe for a native
# git/CVS/SVN user to build a release tree (i.e, 2.6.9) and also to
# continue developing against the current Linus tree, without having the Linus
# tree overwrite the 2.6.9 tree when installed.
#
# Currently, only git is supported.
# Other SCMs can edit scripts/setlocalversion and add the appropriate
# checks as needed.
ifdef CONFIG_LOCALVERSION_AUTO
localversion-auto := $(shell $(PERL) $(srctree)/scripts/setlocalversion $(srctree))
LOCALVERSION := $(LOCALVERSION)$(localversion-auto)
endif
#
# INSTALL_MOD_PATH specifies a prefix to MODLIB for module directory
# relocations required by build roots. This is not defined in the
# makefile but the arguement can be passed to make if needed.
#
MODLIB := $(INSTALL_MOD_PATH)/lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)
MODLIB = $(INSTALL_MOD_PATH)/lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)
export MODLIB
@ -784,6 +757,48 @@ $(sort $(vmlinux-init) $(vmlinux-main)) $(vmlinux-lds): $(vmlinux-dirs) ;
$(vmlinux-dirs): prepare scripts
$(Q)$(MAKE) $(build)=$@
# Build the kernel release string
# The KERNELRELEASE is stored in a file named .kernelrelease
# to be used when executing for example make install or make modules_install
#
# Take the contents of any files called localversion* and the config
# variable CONFIG_LOCALVERSION and append them to KERNELRELEASE.
# LOCALVERSION from the command line override all of this
nullstring :=
space := $(nullstring) # end of line
___localver = $(objtree)/localversion* $(srctree)/localversion*
__localver = $(sort $(wildcard $(___localver)))
# skip backup files (containing '~')
_localver = $(foreach f, $(__localver), $(if $(findstring ~, $(f)),,$(f)))
localver = $(subst $(space),, \
$(shell cat /dev/null $(_localver)) \
$(patsubst "%",%,$(CONFIG_LOCALVERSION)))
# If CONFIG_LOCALVERSION_AUTO is set scripts/setlocalversion is called
# and if the SCM is know a tag from the SCM is appended.
# The appended tag is determinded by the SCM used.
#
# Currently, only git is supported.
# Other SCMs can edit scripts/setlocalversion and add the appropriate
# checks as needed.
ifdef CONFIG_LOCALVERSION_AUTO
_localver-auto = $(shell $(CONFIG_SHELL) \
$(srctree)/scripts/setlocalversion $(srctree))
localver-auto = $(LOCALVERSION)$(_localver-auto)
endif
localver-full = $(localver)$(localver-auto)
# Store (new) KERNELRELASE string in .kernelrelease
kernelrelease = $(KERNELVERSION)$(localver-full)
.kernelrelease: FORCE
$(Q)rm -f $@
$(Q)echo $(kernelrelease) > $@
# Things we need to do before we recursively start building the kernel
# or the modules are listed in "prepare".
# A multi level approach is used. prepareN is processed before prepareN-1.
@ -800,8 +815,7 @@ $(vmlinux-dirs): prepare scripts
# and if so do:
# 1) Check that make has not been executed in the kernel src $(srctree)
# 2) Create the include2 directory, used for the second asm symlink
prepare3:
prepare3: .kernelrelease
ifneq ($(KBUILD_SRC),)
@echo ' Using $(srctree) as source for kernel'
$(Q)if [ -f $(srctree)/.config ]; then \
@ -892,7 +906,7 @@ define filechk_version.h
)
endef
include/linux/version.h: $(srctree)/Makefile FORCE
include/linux/version.h: $(srctree)/Makefile .config FORCE
$(call filechk,version.h)
# ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
@ -986,9 +1000,9 @@ CLEAN_FILES += vmlinux System.map \
# Directories & files removed with 'make mrproper'
MRPROPER_DIRS += include/config include2
MRPROPER_FILES += .config .config.old include/asm .version \
MRPROPER_FILES += .config .config.old include/asm .version .old_version \
include/linux/autoconf.h include/linux/version.h \
Module.symvers tags TAGS cscope*
.kernelrelease Module.symvers tags TAGS cscope*
# clean - Delete most, but leave enough to build external modules
#
@ -1066,7 +1080,7 @@ help:
@echo ' all - Build all targets marked with [*]'
@echo '* vmlinux - Build the bare kernel'
@echo '* modules - Build all modules'
@echo ' modules_install - Install all modules'
@echo ' modules_install - Install all modules to INSTALL_MOD_PATH (default: /)'
@echo ' dir/ - Build all files in dir and below'
@echo ' dir/file.[ois] - Build specified target only'
@echo ' dir/file.ko - Build module including final link'
@ -1074,6 +1088,7 @@ help:
@echo ' tags/TAGS - Generate tags file for editors'
@echo ' cscope - Generate cscope index'
@echo ' kernelrelease - Output the release version string'
@echo ' kernelversion - Output the version stored in Makefile'
@echo ''
@echo 'Static analysers'
@echo ' buildcheck - List dangling references to vmlinux discarded sections'
@ -1240,8 +1255,11 @@ cscope: FORCE
quiet_cmd_TAGS = MAKE $@
define cmd_TAGS
rm -f $@; \
ETAGSF=`etags --version | grep -i exuberant >/dev/null && echo "-I __initdata,__exitdata,EXPORT_SYMBOL,EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL --extra=+f"`; \
$(all-sources) | xargs etags $$ETAGSF -a
ETAGSF=`etags --version | grep -i exuberant >/dev/null && \
echo "-I __initdata,__exitdata,__acquires,__releases \
-I EXPORT_SYMBOL,EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL \
--extra=+f --c-kinds=+px"`; \
$(all-sources) | xargs etags $$ETAGSF -a
endef
TAGS: FORCE
@ -1251,8 +1269,11 @@ TAGS: FORCE
quiet_cmd_tags = MAKE $@
define cmd_tags
rm -f $@; \
CTAGSF=`ctags --version | grep -i exuberant >/dev/null && echo "-I __initdata,__exitdata,EXPORT_SYMBOL,EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL --extra=+f"`; \
$(all-sources) | xargs ctags $$CTAGSF -a
CTAGSF=`ctags --version | grep -i exuberant >/dev/null && \
echo "-I __initdata,__exitdata,__acquires,__releases \
-I EXPORT_SYMBOL,EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL \
--extra=+f --c-kinds=+px"`; \
$(all-sources) | xargs ctags $$CTAGSF -a
endef
tags: FORCE
@ -1288,7 +1309,10 @@ checkstack:
$(PERL) $(src)/scripts/checkstack.pl $(ARCH)
kernelrelease:
@echo $(KERNELRELEASE)
$(if $(wildcard .kernelrelease), $(Q)echo $(KERNELRELEASE), \
$(error kernelrelease not valid - run 'make *config' to update it))
kernelversion:
@echo $(KERNELVERSION)
# FIXME Should go into a make.lib or something
# ===========================================================================

Некоторые файлы не были показаны из-за слишком большого количества измененных файлов Показать больше